1 //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 //  This file implements the ASTContext interface.
11 //
12 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13 
14 #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
15 #include "CXXABI.h"
16 #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h"
17 #include "clang/AST/Attr.h"
18 #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h"
19 #include "clang/AST/Comment.h"
20 #include "clang/AST/CommentCommandTraits.h"
21 #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h"
22 #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
23 #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h"
24 #include "clang/AST/Expr.h"
25 #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
26 #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h"
27 #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h"
28 #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h"
29 #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h"
30 #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h"
31 #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
32 #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
33 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h"
34 #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h"
35 #include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h"
36 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
37 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
38 #include <map>
39 
40 using namespace clang;
41 
42 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors;
43 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared;
44 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors;
45 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared;
46 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors;
47 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared;
48 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators;
49 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
50 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators;
51 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
52 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors;
53 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared;
54 
55 enum FloatingRank {
56   HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank
57 };
58 
59 RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const {
60   if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) {
61     ExternalSource->ReadComments();
62     CommentsLoaded = true;
63   }
64 
65   assert(D);
66 
67   // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations.
68   if (D->isImplicit())
69     return NULL;
70 
71   // User can not attach documentation to implicit instantiations.
72   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
73     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
74       return NULL;
75   }
76 
77   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
78     if (VD->isStaticDataMember() &&
79         VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
80       return NULL;
81   }
82 
83   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
84     if (CRD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
85       return NULL;
86   }
87 
88   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
89     if (ED->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
90       return NULL;
91   }
92 
93   // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly.
94   if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D))
95     return NULL;
96 
97   // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template
98   // documentation.
99   if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) ||
100       isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) ||
101       isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D))
102     return NULL;
103 
104   ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments();
105 
106   // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything.
107   if (RawComments.empty())
108     return NULL;
109 
110   // Find declaration location.
111   // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple
112   // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration
113   // location".
114   // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently,
115   // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location".
116   SourceLocation DeclLoc;
117   if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) ||
118       isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) ||
119       isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) ||
120       isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D))
121     DeclLoc = D->getLocStart();
122   else
123     DeclLoc = D->getLocation();
124 
125   // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we
126   // can't find the comment.
127   if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID())
128     return NULL;
129 
130   // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration.
131   ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment;
132   {
133     // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking
134     // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them
135     // first.
136     RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc(SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc));
137     BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr);
138     ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1;
139     bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
140     if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) {
141       MaybeBeforeDecl--;
142       Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
143     }
144 
145     if (Found) {
146       Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1;
147       assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
148                                          &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare));
149     } else {
150       // Slow path.
151       Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
152                                  &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare);
153     }
154   }
155 
156   // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the
157   // file buffer.
158   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc);
159 
160   // First check whether we have a trailing comment.
161   if (Comment != RawComments.end() &&
162       (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() &&
163       (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D))) {
164     std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp
165       = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin());
166     // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts
167     // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration.
168     if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first &&
169         SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second)
170           == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first,
171                                      CommentBeginDecomp.second)) {
172       return *Comment;
173     }
174   }
175 
176   // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment.
177   // Let's look at the previous comment.
178   if (Comment == RawComments.begin())
179     return NULL;
180   --Comment;
181 
182   // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment.
183   if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment())
184     return NULL;
185 
186   // Decompose the end of the comment.
187   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp
188     = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd());
189 
190   // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they
191   // aren't related.
192   if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first)
193     return NULL;
194 
195   // Get the corresponding buffer.
196   bool Invalid = false;
197   const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first,
198                                                &Invalid).data();
199   if (Invalid)
200     return NULL;
201 
202   // Extract text between the comment and declaration.
203   StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second,
204                  DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second);
205 
206   // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between
207   // comment and declaration.
208   if (Text.find_first_of(",;{}#@") != StringRef::npos)
209     return NULL;
210 
211   return *Comment;
212 }
213 
214 namespace {
215 /// If we have a 'templated' declaration for a template, adjust 'D' to
216 /// refer to the actual template.
217 /// If we have an implicit instantiation, adjust 'D' to refer to template.
218 const Decl *adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl *D) {
219   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
220     // Is this function declaration part of a function template?
221     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getDescribedFunctionTemplate())
222       return FTD;
223 
224     // Nothing to do if function is not an implicit instantiation.
225     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
226       return D;
227 
228     // Function is an implicit instantiation of a function template?
229     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getPrimaryTemplate())
230       return FTD;
231 
232     // Function is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
233     if (const FunctionDecl *MemberDecl =
234             FD->getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction())
235       return MemberDecl;
236 
237     return D;
238   }
239   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
240     // Static data member is instantiated from a member definition of a class
241     // template?
242     if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
243       if (const VarDecl *MemberDecl = VD->getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember())
244         return MemberDecl;
245 
246     return D;
247   }
248   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
249     // Is this class declaration part of a class template?
250     if (const ClassTemplateDecl *CTD = CRD->getDescribedClassTemplate())
251       return CTD;
252 
253     // Class is an implicit instantiation of a class template or partial
254     // specialization?
255     if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD =
256             dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(CRD)) {
257       if (CTSD->getSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
258         return D;
259       llvm::PointerUnion<ClassTemplateDecl *,
260                          ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>
261           PU = CTSD->getSpecializedTemplateOrPartial();
262       return PU.is<ClassTemplateDecl*>() ?
263           static_cast<const Decl*>(PU.get<ClassTemplateDecl *>()) :
264           static_cast<const Decl*>(
265               PU.get<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>());
266     }
267 
268     // Class is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
269     if (const MemberSpecializationInfo *Info =
270                    CRD->getMemberSpecializationInfo())
271       return Info->getInstantiatedFrom();
272 
273     return D;
274   }
275   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
276     // Enum is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
277     if (const EnumDecl *MemberDecl = ED->getInstantiatedFromMemberEnum())
278       return MemberDecl;
279 
280     return D;
281   }
282   // FIXME: Adjust alias templates?
283   return D;
284 }
285 } // unnamed namespace
286 
287 const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(
288                                                 const Decl *D,
289                                                 const Decl **OriginalDecl) const {
290   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
291 
292   // Check whether we have cached a comment for this declaration already.
293   {
294     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
295         RedeclComments.find(D);
296     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
297       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
298       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
299         if (OriginalDecl)
300           *OriginalDecl = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
301         return Raw.getRaw();
302       }
303     }
304   }
305 
306   // Search for comments attached to declarations in the redeclaration chain.
307   const RawComment *RC = NULL;
308   const Decl *OriginalDeclForRC = NULL;
309   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
310                              E = D->redecls_end();
311        I != E; ++I) {
312     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
313         RedeclComments.find(*I);
314     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
315       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
316       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
317         RC = Raw.getRaw();
318         OriginalDeclForRC = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
319         break;
320       }
321     } else {
322       RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(*I);
323       OriginalDeclForRC = *I;
324       RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
325       if (RC) {
326         Raw.setRaw(RC);
327         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromDecl);
328       } else
329         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl);
330       Raw.setOriginalDecl(*I);
331       RedeclComments[*I] = Raw;
332       if (RC)
333         break;
334     }
335   }
336 
337   // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment.
338   assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation());
339 
340   if (OriginalDecl)
341     *OriginalDecl = OriginalDeclForRC;
342 
343   // Update cache for every declaration in the redeclaration chain.
344   RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
345   Raw.setRaw(RC);
346   Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromRedecl);
347   Raw.setOriginalDecl(OriginalDeclForRC);
348 
349   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
350                              E = D->redecls_end();
351        I != E; ++I) {
352     RawCommentAndCacheFlags &R = RedeclComments[*I];
353     if (R.getKind() == RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl)
354       R = Raw;
355   }
356 
357   return RC;
358 }
359 
360 static void addRedeclaredMethods(const ObjCMethodDecl *ObjCMethod,
361                    SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Redeclared) {
362   const DeclContext *DC = ObjCMethod->getDeclContext();
363   if (const ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(DC)) {
364     const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = IMD->getClassInterface();
365     if (!ID)
366       return;
367     // Add redeclared method here.
368     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *ClsExtDecl = ID->getFirstClassExtension();
369          ClsExtDecl; ClsExtDecl = ClsExtDecl->getNextClassExtension()) {
370       if (ObjCMethodDecl *RedeclaredMethod =
371             ClsExtDecl->getMethod(ObjCMethod->getSelector(),
372                                   ObjCMethod->isInstanceMethod()))
373         Redeclared.push_back(RedeclaredMethod);
374     }
375   }
376 }
377 
378 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::cloneFullComment(comments::FullComment *FC,
379                                                     const Decl *D) const {
380   comments::DeclInfo *ThisDeclInfo = new (*this) comments::DeclInfo;
381   ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = D;
382   ThisDeclInfo->IsFilled = false;
383   ThisDeclInfo->fill();
384   ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = FC->getDecl();
385   comments::FullComment *CFC =
386     new (*this) comments::FullComment(FC->getBlocks(),
387                                       ThisDeclInfo);
388   return CFC;
389 
390 }
391 
392 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl(
393                                               const Decl *D,
394                                               const Preprocessor *PP) const {
395   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
396 
397   const Decl *Canonical = D->getCanonicalDecl();
398   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, comments::FullComment *>::iterator Pos =
399       ParsedComments.find(Canonical);
400 
401   if (Pos != ParsedComments.end()) {
402     if (Canonical != D) {
403       comments::FullComment *FC = Pos->second;
404       comments::FullComment *CFC = cloneFullComment(FC, D);
405       return CFC;
406     }
407     return Pos->second;
408   }
409 
410   const Decl *OriginalDecl;
411 
412   const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(D, &OriginalDecl);
413   if (!RC) {
414     if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
415       SmallVector<const NamedDecl*, 8> Overridden;
416       if (const ObjCMethodDecl *OMD = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D))
417         addRedeclaredMethods(OMD, Overridden);
418       getOverriddenMethods(dyn_cast<NamedDecl>(D), Overridden);
419       for (unsigned i = 0, e = Overridden.size(); i < e; i++) {
420         if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(Overridden[i], PP)) {
421           comments::FullComment *CFC = cloneFullComment(FC, D);
422           return CFC;
423         }
424       }
425     }
426     return NULL;
427   }
428 
429   // If the RawComment was attached to other redeclaration of this Decl, we
430   // should parse the comment in context of that other Decl.  This is important
431   // because comments can contain references to parameter names which can be
432   // different across redeclarations.
433   if (D != OriginalDecl)
434     return getCommentForDecl(OriginalDecl, PP);
435 
436   comments::FullComment *FC = RC->parse(*this, PP, D);
437   ParsedComments[Canonical] = FC;
438   return FC;
439 }
440 
441 void
442 ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
443                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) {
444   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth());
445   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition());
446   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack());
447 
448   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters();
449   ID.AddInteger(Params->size());
450   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
451                                           PEnd = Params->end();
452        P != PEnd; ++P) {
453     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) {
454       ID.AddInteger(0);
455       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack());
456       continue;
457     }
458 
459     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
460       ID.AddInteger(1);
461       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack());
462       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
463       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
464         ID.AddBoolean(true);
465         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes());
466         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
467           QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I);
468           ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
469         }
470       } else
471         ID.AddBoolean(false);
472       continue;
473     }
474 
475     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P);
476     ID.AddInteger(2);
477     Profile(ID, TTP);
478   }
479 }
480 
481 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *
482 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
483                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const {
484   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter.
485   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
486   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP);
487   void *InsertPos = 0;
488   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical
489     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
490   if (Canonical)
491     return Canonical->getParam();
492 
493   // Build a canonical template parameter list.
494   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters();
495   SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams;
496   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size());
497   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
498                                           PEnd = Params->end();
499        P != PEnd; ++P) {
500     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P))
501       CanonParams.push_back(
502                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
503                                                SourceLocation(),
504                                                SourceLocation(),
505                                                TTP->getDepth(),
506                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false,
507                                                TTP->isParameterPack()));
508     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP
509              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
510       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType());
511       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
512       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param;
513       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
514         SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes;
515         SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos;
516         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
517           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I)));
518           ExpandedTInfos.push_back(
519                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back()));
520         }
521 
522         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
523                                                 SourceLocation(),
524                                                 SourceLocation(),
525                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
526                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
527                                                 T,
528                                                 TInfo,
529                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(),
530                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(),
531                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data());
532       } else {
533         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
534                                                 SourceLocation(),
535                                                 SourceLocation(),
536                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
537                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
538                                                 T,
539                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(),
540                                                 TInfo);
541       }
542       CanonParams.push_back(Param);
543 
544     } else
545       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
546                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P)));
547   }
548 
549   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP
550     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
551                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(),
552                                        TTP->getPosition(),
553                                        TTP->isParameterPack(),
554                                        0,
555                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(),
556                                                        SourceLocation(),
557                                                        CanonParams.data(),
558                                                        CanonParams.size(),
559                                                        SourceLocation()));
560 
561   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
562   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
563   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!");
564   (void)Canonical;
565 
566   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry.
567   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP);
568   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos);
569   return CanonTTP;
570 }
571 
572 CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) {
573   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0;
574 
575   switch (T.getCXXABI()) {
576   case CXXABI_ARM:
577     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this);
578   case CXXABI_Itanium:
579     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this);
580   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
581     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this);
582   }
583   llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!");
584 }
585 
586 static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T,
587                                              const LangOptions &LOpts) {
588   if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) {
589     // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each
590     // language-specific address space.
591     static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = {
592       1, // opencl_global
593       2, // opencl_local
594       3, // opencl_constant
595       4, // cuda_device
596       5, // cuda_constant
597       6  // cuda_shared
598     };
599     return &FakeAddrSpaceMap;
600   } else {
601     return &T.getAddressSpaceMap();
602   }
603 }
604 
605 ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM,
606                        const TargetInfo *t,
607                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels,
608                        Builtin::Context &builtins,
609                        unsigned size_reserve,
610                        bool DelayInitialization)
611   : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()),
612     TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
613     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
614     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()),
615     GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0),
616     Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0),
617     BuiltinVaListDecl(0),
618     ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0),
619     BOOLDecl(0),
620     CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0),
621     FILEDecl(0),
622     jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0),
623     BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0),
624     cudaConfigureCallDecl(0),
625     NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()),
626     FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(),
627     SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts),
628     AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts),
629     Idents(idents), Selectors(sels),
630     BuiltinInfo(builtins),
631     DeclarationNames(*this),
632     ExternalSource(0), Listener(0),
633     Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false),
634     CommentCommandTraits(BumpAlloc),
635     LastSDM(0, 0),
636     UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0)
637 {
638   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve);
639   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this);
640 
641   if (!DelayInitialization) {
642     assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization");
643     InitBuiltinTypes(*t);
644   }
645 }
646 
647 ASTContext::~ASTContext() {
648   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects.
649   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution?
650   ReleaseDeclContextMaps();
651 
652   // Call all of the deallocation functions.
653   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I)
654     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second);
655 
656   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed
657   // because they can contain DenseMaps.
658   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*,
659        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
660        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; )
661     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
662     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
663       R->Destroy(*this);
664 
665   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
666        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) {
667     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
668     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
669       R->Destroy(*this);
670   }
671 
672   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(),
673                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end();
674        A != AEnd; ++A)
675     A->second->~AttrVec();
676 }
677 
678 void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) {
679   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data));
680 }
681 
682 void
683 ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) {
684   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take());
685 }
686 
687 void ASTContext::PrintStats() const {
688   llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n";
689   llvm::errs() << "  " << Types.size() << " types total.\n";
690 
691   unsigned counts[] = {
692 #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0,
693 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
694 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
695     0 // Extra
696   };
697 
698   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) {
699     Type *T = Types[i];
700     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++;
701   }
702 
703   unsigned Idx = 0;
704   unsigned TotalBytes = 0;
705 #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \
706   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \
707     llvm::errs() << "    " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name               \
708                  << " types\n";                                         \
709   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \
710   ++Idx;
711 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
712 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
713 
714   llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n";
715 
716   // Implicit special member functions.
717   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/"
718                << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors
719                << " implicit default constructors created\n";
720   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/"
721                << NumImplicitCopyConstructors
722                << " implicit copy constructors created\n";
723   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
724     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/"
725                  << NumImplicitMoveConstructors
726                  << " implicit move constructors created\n";
727   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
728                << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators
729                << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n";
730   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
731     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
732                  << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators
733                  << " implicit move assignment operators created\n";
734   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/"
735                << NumImplicitDestructors
736                << " implicit destructors created\n";
737 
738   if (ExternalSource.get()) {
739     llvm::errs() << "\n";
740     ExternalSource->PrintStats();
741   }
742 
743   BumpAlloc.PrintStats();
744 }
745 
746 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const {
747   if (!Int128Decl) {
748     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty);
749     Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
750                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
751                                      SourceLocation(),
752                                      SourceLocation(),
753                                      &Idents.get("__int128_t"),
754                                      TInfo);
755   }
756 
757   return Int128Decl;
758 }
759 
760 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const {
761   if (!UInt128Decl) {
762     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty);
763     UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
764                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
765                                      SourceLocation(),
766                                      SourceLocation(),
767                                      &Idents.get("__uint128_t"),
768                                      TInfo);
769   }
770 
771   return UInt128Decl;
772 }
773 
774 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) {
775   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K);
776   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0));
777   Types.push_back(Ty);
778 }
779 
780 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) {
781   assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) &&
782          "Incorrect target reinitialization");
783   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?");
784 
785   this->Target = &Target;
786 
787   ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target));
788   AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts);
789 
790   // C99 6.2.5p19.
791   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void);
792 
793   // C99 6.2.5p2.
794   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool);
795   // C99 6.2.5p3.
796   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned)
797     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S);
798   else
799     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U);
800   // C99 6.2.5p4.
801   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar);
802   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short);
803   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int);
804   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long);
805   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong);
806 
807   // C99 6.2.5p6.
808   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar);
809   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort);
810   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt);
811   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong);
812   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong);
813 
814   // C99 6.2.5p10.
815   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float);
816   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double);
817   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble);
818 
819   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers.
820   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128);
821   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128);
822 
823   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus && LangOpts.WChar) { // C++ 3.9.1p5
824     if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType()))
825       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S);
826     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned.
827       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U);
828   } else // C99 (or C++ using -fno-wchar)
829     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType());
830 
831   WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType());
832 
833   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
834     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16);
835   else // C99
836     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type());
837 
838   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
839     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32);
840   else // C99
841     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type());
842 
843   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is
844   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against
845   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to
846   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent
847   // expressions.
848   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent);
849 
850   // Placeholder type for functions.
851   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload);
852 
853   // Placeholder type for bound members.
854   InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy,       BuiltinType::BoundMember);
855 
856   // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects.
857   InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy,      BuiltinType::PseudoObject);
858 
859   // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients.
860   InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy,        BuiltinType::UnknownAny);
861 
862   // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts.
863   InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy,  BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast);
864 
865   // Placeholder type for builtin functions.
866   InitBuiltinType(BuiltinFnTy,  BuiltinType::BuiltinFn);
867 
868   // C99 6.2.5p11.
869   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy);
870   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy);
871   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy);
872 
873   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'.
874   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId);
875   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass);
876   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel);
877 
878   if (LangOpts.OpenCL) {
879     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1d);
880     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray);
881     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dBufferTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer);
882     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2d);
883     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray);
884     InitBuiltinType(OCLImage3dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage3d);
885   }
886 
887   // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no
888   ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ?
889                        SignedCharTy : BoolTy);
890 
891   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType();
892 
893   ObjCSuperType = QualType();
894 
895   // void * type
896   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy);
897 
898   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7)
899   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr);
900 
901   // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16
902   InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half);
903 
904   // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list.
905   VaListTagTy = QualType();
906 }
907 
908 DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const {
909   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics();
910 }
911 
912 AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
913   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D];
914   if (!Result) {
915     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec));
916     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec;
917   }
918 
919   return *Result;
920 }
921 
922 /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration.
923 void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
924   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D);
925   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) {
926     Pos->second->~AttrVec();
927     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos);
928   }
929 }
930 
931 MemberSpecializationInfo *
932 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) {
933   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
934   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos
935     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var);
936   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end())
937     return 0;
938 
939   return Pos->second;
940 }
941 
942 void
943 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl,
944                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,
945                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) {
946   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
947   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
948   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] &&
949          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from");
950   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]
951     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation);
952 }
953 
954 FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(
955                                                      const FunctionDecl *FD){
956   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
957   llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
958     = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD);
959   if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end())
960     return 0;
961 
962   return Pos->second;
963 }
964 
965 void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD,
966                                         FunctionDecl *Pattern) {
967   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
968   assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0");
969   ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern;
970 }
971 
972 NamedDecl *
973 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) {
974   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
975     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD);
976   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end())
977     return 0;
978 
979   return Pos->second;
980 }
981 
982 void
983 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) {
984   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) ||
985           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) ||
986           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&
987          "pattern decl is not a using decl");
988   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
989   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
990 }
991 
992 UsingShadowDecl *
993 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) {
994   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos
995     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst);
996   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end())
997     return 0;
998 
999   return Pos->second;
1000 }
1001 
1002 void
1003 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst,
1004                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) {
1005   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
1006   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
1007 }
1008 
1009 FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) {
1010   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos
1011     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field);
1012   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end())
1013     return 0;
1014 
1015   return Pos->second;
1016 }
1017 
1018 void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst,
1019                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) {
1020   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed");
1021   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed");
1022   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] &&
1023          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from");
1024 
1025   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl;
1026 }
1027 
1028 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1029                                     const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1030   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
1031           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0);
1032 }
1033 
1034 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1035                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1036   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1037           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0 &&
1038           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this) != 0);
1039 }
1040 
1041 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1042                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1043   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1044           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) &&
1045           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1046 }
1047 
1048 bool ASTContext::NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1049                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1050   return (!FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
1051           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1052 }
1053 
1054 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
1055                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
1056   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
1057           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
1058 }
1059 
1060 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
1061 ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1062   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1063     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1064   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1065     return 0;
1066 
1067   return Pos->second.begin();
1068 }
1069 
1070 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
1071 ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1072   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1073     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1074   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1075     return 0;
1076 
1077   return Pos->second.end();
1078 }
1079 
1080 unsigned
1081 ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1082   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1083     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl());
1084   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1085     return 0;
1086 
1087   return Pos->second.size();
1088 }
1089 
1090 void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,
1091                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) {
1092   assert(Method->isCanonicalDecl() && Overridden->isCanonicalDecl());
1093   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden);
1094 }
1095 
1096 void ASTContext::getOverriddenMethods(
1097                       const NamedDecl *D,
1098                       SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Overridden) const {
1099   assert(D);
1100 
1101   if (const CXXMethodDecl *CXXMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(D)) {
1102     Overridden.append(CXXMethod->begin_overridden_methods(),
1103                       CXXMethod->end_overridden_methods());
1104     return;
1105   }
1106 
1107   const ObjCMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D);
1108   if (!Method)
1109     return;
1110 
1111   SmallVector<const ObjCMethodDecl *, 8> OverDecls;
1112   Method->getOverriddenMethods(OverDecls);
1113   Overridden.append(OverDecls.begin(), OverDecls.end());
1114 }
1115 
1116 void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) {
1117   assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain");
1118   assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration");
1119   if (!FirstLocalImport) {
1120     FirstLocalImport = Import;
1121     LastLocalImport = Import;
1122     return;
1123   }
1124 
1125   LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import;
1126   LastLocalImport = Import;
1127 }
1128 
1129 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1130 //                         Type Sizing and Analysis
1131 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1132 
1133 /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified
1134 /// scalar floating point type.
1135 const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const {
1136   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
1137   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!");
1138   switch (BT->getKind()) {
1139   default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!");
1140   case BuiltinType::Half:       return Target->getHalfFormat();
1141   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target->getFloatFormat();
1142   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target->getDoubleFormat();
1143   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat();
1144   }
1145 }
1146 
1147 /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the
1148 /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so
1149 /// this method will assert on them.
1150 /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type
1151 /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen).
1152 CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const {
1153   unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth();
1154 
1155   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false;
1156   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) {
1157     Align = AlignFromAttr;
1158 
1159     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment
1160     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases
1161     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified.
1162     //
1163     // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can
1164     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it.
1165     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) {
1166       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1167         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1168     } else {
1169       UseAlignAttrOnly = true;
1170     }
1171   }
1172   else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D))
1173       UseAlignAttrOnly =
1174         D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1175         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1176 
1177   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything
1178   // else about the declaration and its type.
1179   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) {
1180     // do nothing
1181 
1182   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) {
1183     QualType T = VD->getType();
1184     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) {
1185       if (RefAsPointee)
1186         T = RT->getPointeeType();
1187       else
1188         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType());
1189     }
1190     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) {
1191       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the
1192       // large-array alignment on the target.
1193       unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth();
1194       const ArrayType *arrayType;
1195       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) {
1196         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType))
1197           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1198         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) &&
1199                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType)))
1200           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1201 
1202         // Walk through any array types while we're at it.
1203         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType);
1204       }
1205       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr()));
1206     }
1207 
1208     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if
1209     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a
1210     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate
1211     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then
1212     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type.
1213     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) {
1214       // So calculate the alignment of the field.
1215       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent());
1216 
1217       // Start with the record's overall alignment.
1218       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment());
1219 
1220       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record.
1221       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex());
1222       if (offset > 0) {
1223         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2,
1224         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's.
1225         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1);
1226         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign)
1227           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset);
1228       }
1229 
1230       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign);
1231     }
1232   }
1233 
1234   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align);
1235 }
1236 
1237 // getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars - Return the size of a type, in
1238 // chars. If the type is a record, its data size is returned.  This is
1239 // the size of the memcpy that's performed when assigning this type
1240 // using a trivial copy/move assignment operator.
1241 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1242 ASTContext::getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1243   std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> sizeAndAlign = getTypeInfoInChars(T);
1244 
1245   // In C++, objects can sometimes be allocated into the tail padding
1246   // of a base-class subobject.  We decide whether that's possible
1247   // during class layout, so here we can just trust the layout results.
1248   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
1249     if (const RecordType *RT = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
1250       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1251       sizeAndAlign.first = layout.getDataSize();
1252     }
1253   }
1254 
1255   return sizeAndAlign;
1256 }
1257 
1258 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1259 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const {
1260   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T);
1261   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first),
1262                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second));
1263 }
1264 
1265 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1266 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const {
1267   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr());
1268 }
1269 
1270 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const {
1271   TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T);
1272   if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end())
1273     return it->second;
1274 
1275   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T);
1276   MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info));
1277   return Info;
1278 }
1279 
1280 /// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This
1281 /// method does not work on incomplete types.
1282 ///
1283 /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and
1284 /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this
1285 /// should take a QualType, &c.
1286 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned>
1287 ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const {
1288   uint64_t Width=0;
1289   unsigned Align=8;
1290   switch (T->getTypeClass()) {
1291 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1292 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1293 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base)
1294 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1295 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1296     llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types");
1297 
1298   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1299   case Type::FunctionProto:
1300     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits
1301     Width = 0;
1302     Align = 32;
1303     break;
1304 
1305   case Type::IncompleteArray:
1306   case Type::VariableArray:
1307     Width = 0;
1308     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType());
1309     break;
1310 
1311   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1312     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T);
1313 
1314     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType());
1315     uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue();
1316     assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) &&
1317            "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation");
1318     Width = EltInfo.first*Size;
1319     Align = EltInfo.second;
1320     Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1321     break;
1322   }
1323   case Type::ExtVector:
1324   case Type::Vector: {
1325     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T);
1326     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType());
1327     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements();
1328     Align = Width;
1329     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2.
1330     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors.
1331     if (Align & (Align-1)) {
1332       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align);
1333       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1334     }
1335     // Adjust the alignment based on the target max.
1336     uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign();
1337     if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align)
1338       Align = TargetVectorAlign;
1339     break;
1340   }
1341 
1342   case Type::Builtin:
1343     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
1344     default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!");
1345     case BuiltinType::Void:
1346       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits.
1347       Width = 0;
1348       Align = 8;
1349       break;
1350 
1351     case BuiltinType::Bool:
1352       Width = Target->getBoolWidth();
1353       Align = Target->getBoolAlign();
1354       break;
1355     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
1356     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
1357     case BuiltinType::UChar:
1358     case BuiltinType::SChar:
1359       Width = Target->getCharWidth();
1360       Align = Target->getCharAlign();
1361       break;
1362     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
1363     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
1364       Width = Target->getWCharWidth();
1365       Align = Target->getWCharAlign();
1366       break;
1367     case BuiltinType::Char16:
1368       Width = Target->getChar16Width();
1369       Align = Target->getChar16Align();
1370       break;
1371     case BuiltinType::Char32:
1372       Width = Target->getChar32Width();
1373       Align = Target->getChar32Align();
1374       break;
1375     case BuiltinType::UShort:
1376     case BuiltinType::Short:
1377       Width = Target->getShortWidth();
1378       Align = Target->getShortAlign();
1379       break;
1380     case BuiltinType::UInt:
1381     case BuiltinType::Int:
1382       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1383       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1384       break;
1385     case BuiltinType::ULong:
1386     case BuiltinType::Long:
1387       Width = Target->getLongWidth();
1388       Align = Target->getLongAlign();
1389       break;
1390     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
1391     case BuiltinType::LongLong:
1392       Width = Target->getLongLongWidth();
1393       Align = Target->getLongLongAlign();
1394       break;
1395     case BuiltinType::Int128:
1396     case BuiltinType::UInt128:
1397       Width = 128;
1398       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets.
1399       break;
1400     case BuiltinType::Half:
1401       Width = Target->getHalfWidth();
1402       Align = Target->getHalfAlign();
1403       break;
1404     case BuiltinType::Float:
1405       Width = Target->getFloatWidth();
1406       Align = Target->getFloatAlign();
1407       break;
1408     case BuiltinType::Double:
1409       Width = Target->getDoubleWidth();
1410       Align = Target->getDoubleAlign();
1411       break;
1412     case BuiltinType::LongDouble:
1413       Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth();
1414       Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign();
1415       break;
1416     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:
1417       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t)
1418       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*)
1419       break;
1420     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
1421     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
1422     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
1423       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1424       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1425       break;
1426     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d:
1427     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray:
1428     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer:
1429     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d:
1430     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray:
1431     case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d:
1432       // Currently these types are pointers to opaque types.
1433       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1434       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1435       break;
1436     }
1437     break;
1438   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1439     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1440     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1441     break;
1442   case Type::BlockPointer: {
1443     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1444         cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1445     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1446     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1447     break;
1448   }
1449   case Type::LValueReference:
1450   case Type::RValueReference: {
1451     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go
1452     // the pointer route.
1453     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1454         cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1455     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1456     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1457     break;
1458   }
1459   case Type::Pointer: {
1460     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1461     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1462     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1463     break;
1464   }
1465   case Type::MemberPointer: {
1466     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T);
1467     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> PtrDiffInfo =
1468       getTypeInfo(getPointerDiffType());
1469     Width = PtrDiffInfo.first * ABI->getMemberPointerSize(MPT);
1470     Align = PtrDiffInfo.second;
1471     break;
1472   }
1473   case Type::Complex: {
1474     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the
1475     // size.
1476     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo =
1477       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType());
1478     Width = EltInfo.first*2;
1479     Align = EltInfo.second;
1480     break;
1481   }
1482   case Type::ObjCObject:
1483     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr());
1484   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
1485     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T);
1486     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl());
1487     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1488     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1489     break;
1490   }
1491   case Type::Record:
1492   case Type::Enum: {
1493     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T);
1494 
1495     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) {
1496       Width = 8;
1497       Align = 8;
1498       break;
1499     }
1500 
1501     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT))
1502       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType());
1503 
1504     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT);
1505     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1506     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1507     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1508     break;
1509   }
1510 
1511   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm:
1512     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)->
1513                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr());
1514 
1515   case Type::Auto: {
1516     const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T);
1517     assert(A->isDeduced() && "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1518     return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr());
1519   }
1520 
1521   case Type::Paren:
1522     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr());
1523 
1524   case Type::Typedef: {
1525     const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl();
1526     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1527       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1528     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed
1529     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that
1530     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation.
1531     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment())
1532       Align = AttrAlign;
1533     else
1534       Align = Info.second;
1535     Width = Info.first;
1536     break;
1537   }
1538 
1539   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1540     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1541                          .getTypePtr());
1542 
1543   case Type::TypeOf:
1544     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1545 
1546   case Type::Decltype:
1547     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1548                         .getTypePtr());
1549 
1550   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1551     return getTypeInfo(cast<UnaryTransformType>(T)->getUnderlyingType());
1552 
1553   case Type::Elaborated:
1554     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr());
1555 
1556   case Type::Attributed:
1557     return getTypeInfo(
1558                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr());
1559 
1560   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: {
1561     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T &&
1562            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1563     const TemplateSpecializationType *TST = cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(T);
1564     // A type alias template specialization may refer to a typedef with the
1565     // aligned attribute on it.
1566     if (TST->isTypeAlias())
1567       return getTypeInfo(TST->getAliasedType().getTypePtr());
1568     else
1569       return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T));
1570   }
1571 
1572   case Type::Atomic: {
1573     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1574       = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType());
1575     Width = Info.first;
1576     Align = Info.second;
1577     if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth() &&
1578         llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width)) {
1579       // We can potentially perform lock-free atomic operations for this
1580       // type; promote the alignment appropriately.
1581       // FIXME: We could potentially promote the width here as well...
1582       // is that worthwhile?  (Non-struct atomic types generally have
1583       // power-of-two size anyway, but structs might not.  Requires a bit
1584       // of implementation work to make sure we zero out the extra bits.)
1585       Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width);
1586     }
1587   }
1588 
1589   }
1590 
1591   assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2");
1592   return std::make_pair(Width, Align);
1593 }
1594 
1595 /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters.
1596 CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const {
1597   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth());
1598 }
1599 
1600 /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters.
1601 int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const {
1602   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth();
1603 }
1604 
1605 /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters.
1606 /// This method does not work on incomplete types.
1607 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1608   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1609 }
1610 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const {
1611   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1612 }
1613 
1614 /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in
1615 /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types.
1616 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const {
1617   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1618 }
1619 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const {
1620   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1621 }
1622 
1623 /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified
1624 /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI
1625 /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign
1626 /// a data type.
1627 unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const {
1628   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T);
1629 
1630   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible.
1631   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
1632     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr();
1633   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) ||
1634       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) ||
1635       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong))
1636     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T));
1637 
1638   return ABIAlign;
1639 }
1640 
1641 /// DeepCollectObjCIvars -
1642 /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in
1643 /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for
1644 /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class
1645 /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known.
1646 ///
1647 void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI,
1648                                       bool leafClass,
1649                             SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const {
1650   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass())
1651     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars);
1652   if (!leafClass) {
1653     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(),
1654          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I)
1655       Ivars.push_back(*I);
1656   } else {
1657     ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI);
1658     for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;
1659          Iv= Iv->getNextIvar())
1660       Ivars.push_back(Iv);
1661   }
1662 }
1663 
1664 /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and
1665 /// those inherited by it.
1666 void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl,
1667                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) {
1668   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) {
1669     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of
1670     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.
1671     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(),
1672          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1673       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1674       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1675       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1676            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1677         Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl());
1678         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1679       }
1680     }
1681 
1682     // Categories of this Interface.
1683     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDeclChain = OI->getCategoryList();
1684          CDeclChain; CDeclChain = CDeclChain->getNextClassCategory())
1685       CollectInheritedProtocols(CDeclChain, Protocols);
1686     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass())
1687       while (SD) {
1688         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols);
1689         SD = SD->getSuperClass();
1690       }
1691   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) {
1692     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(),
1693          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1694       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1695       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1696       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1697            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1698         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1699     }
1700   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) {
1701     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(),
1702          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1703       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1704       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1705       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1706            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1707         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1708     }
1709   }
1710 }
1711 
1712 unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const {
1713   unsigned count = 0;
1714   // Count ivars declared in class extension.
1715   for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDecl = OI->getFirstClassExtension(); CDecl;
1716        CDecl = CDecl->getNextClassExtension())
1717     count += CDecl->ivar_size();
1718 
1719   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This
1720   // includes synthesized ivars.
1721   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation())
1722     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size();
1723 
1724   return count;
1725 }
1726 
1727 bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) {
1728   if (!E)
1729     return false;
1730 
1731   // nullptr_t is always treated as null.
1732   if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true;
1733 
1734   if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() &&
1735       E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this,
1736                                                 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull))
1737     return true;
1738 
1739   // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'.
1740   if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true;
1741 
1742   return false;
1743 }
1744 
1745 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists.
1746 ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) {
1747   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1748     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1749   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1750     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second);
1751   return 0;
1752 }
1753 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists.
1754 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) {
1755   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1756     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1757   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1758     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second);
1759   return 0;
1760 }
1761 
1762 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl.
1763 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD,
1764                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) {
1765   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1766   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD;
1767 }
1768 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl.
1769 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD,
1770                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) {
1771   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1772   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD;
1773 }
1774 
1775 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface(NamedDecl *ND) const {
1776   if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1777     return ID;
1778   if (ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1779     return CD->getClassInterface();
1780   if (ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1781     return IMD->getClassInterface();
1782 
1783   return 0;
1784 }
1785 
1786 /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if
1787 /// none exists.
1788 Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) {
1789   assert(VD && "Passed null params");
1790   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1791          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1792   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator
1793     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD);
1794   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0;
1795 }
1796 
1797 /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl.
1798 void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) {
1799   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params");
1800   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1801          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1802   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init;
1803 }
1804 
1805 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1806                                                  unsigned DataSize) const {
1807   if (!DataSize)
1808     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T);
1809   else
1810     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) &&
1811            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!");
1812 
1813   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo =
1814     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8);
1815   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T);
1816   return TInfo;
1817 }
1818 
1819 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1820                                                      SourceLocation L) const {
1821   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T);
1822   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L);
1823   return DI;
1824 }
1825 
1826 const ASTRecordLayout &
1827 ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const {
1828   return getObjCLayout(D, 0);
1829 }
1830 
1831 const ASTRecordLayout &
1832 ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout(
1833                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const {
1834   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D);
1835 }
1836 
1837 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1838 //                   Type creation/memoization methods
1839 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1840 
1841 QualType
1842 ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const {
1843   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers();
1844   quals.removeFastQualifiers();
1845 
1846   // Check if we've already instantiated this type.
1847   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1848   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals);
1849   void *insertPos = 0;
1850   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) {
1851     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals);
1852     return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1853   }
1854 
1855   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type.
1856   QualType canon;
1857   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1858     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split();
1859     canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals);
1860     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals);
1861 
1862     // Re-find the insert position.
1863     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
1864   }
1865 
1866   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals);
1867   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos);
1868   return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1869 }
1870 
1871 QualType
1872 ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const {
1873   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1874   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace)
1875     return T;
1876 
1877   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1878   // into one ExtQuals node.
1879   QualifierCollector Quals;
1880   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1881 
1882   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get
1883   // another one.
1884   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() &&
1885          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!");
1886   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace);
1887 
1888   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1889 }
1890 
1891 QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,
1892                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const {
1893   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1894   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr)
1895     return T;
1896 
1897   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
1898     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType();
1899     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) {
1900       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr);
1901       return getPointerType(ResultType);
1902     }
1903   }
1904 
1905   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1906   // into one ExtQuals node.
1907   QualifierCollector Quals;
1908   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1909 
1910   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get
1911   // another one.
1912   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() &&
1913          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!");
1914   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr);
1915 
1916   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1917 }
1918 
1919 const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T,
1920                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) {
1921   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info)
1922     return T;
1923 
1924   QualType Result;
1925   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) {
1926     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info);
1927   } else {
1928     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T);
1929     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
1930     EPI.ExtInfo = Info;
1931     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->arg_type_begin(),
1932                              FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
1933   }
1934 
1935   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr());
1936 }
1937 
1938 /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex
1939 /// number with the specified element type.
1940 QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const {
1941   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1942   // structure.
1943   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1944   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T);
1945 
1946   void *InsertPos = 0;
1947   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1948     return QualType(CT, 0);
1949 
1950   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1951   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1952   QualType Canonical;
1953   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1954     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T));
1955 
1956     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1957     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1958     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1959   }
1960   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical);
1961   Types.push_back(New);
1962   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1963   return QualType(New, 0);
1964 }
1965 
1966 /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to
1967 /// the specified type.
1968 QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const {
1969   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1970   // structure.
1971   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1972   PointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1973 
1974   void *InsertPos = 0;
1975   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1976     return QualType(PT, 0);
1977 
1978   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1979   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1980   QualType Canonical;
1981   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1982     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1983 
1984     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1985     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1986     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1987   }
1988   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical);
1989   Types.push_back(New);
1990   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1991   return QualType(New, 0);
1992 }
1993 
1994 /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for
1995 /// a pointer to the specified block.
1996 QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const {
1997   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only");
1998   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular
1999   // structure.
2000   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2001   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T);
2002 
2003   void *InsertPos = 0;
2004   if (BlockPointerType *PT =
2005         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2006     return QualType(PT, 0);
2007 
2008   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
2009   // type either so fill in the canonical type field.
2010   QualType Canonical;
2011   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
2012     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
2013 
2014     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2015     BlockPointerType *NewIP =
2016       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2017     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2018   }
2019   BlockPointerType *New
2020     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical);
2021   Types.push_back(New);
2022   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2023   return QualType(New, 0);
2024 }
2025 
2026 /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
2027 /// lvalue reference to the specified type.
2028 QualType
2029 ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const {
2030   assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy &&
2031          "Unresolved overloaded function type");
2032 
2033   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2034   // structure.
2035   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2036   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue);
2037 
2038   void *InsertPos = 0;
2039   if (LValueReferenceType *RT =
2040         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2041     return QualType(RT, 0);
2042 
2043   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
2044 
2045   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2046   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2047   QualType Canonical;
2048   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
2049     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
2050     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
2051 
2052     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2053     LValueReferenceType *NewIP =
2054       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2055     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2056   }
2057 
2058   LValueReferenceType *New
2059     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical,
2060                                                      SpelledAsLValue);
2061   Types.push_back(New);
2062   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2063 
2064   return QualType(New, 0);
2065 }
2066 
2067 /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
2068 /// rvalue reference to the specified type.
2069 QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const {
2070   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2071   // structure.
2072   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2073   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false);
2074 
2075   void *InsertPos = 0;
2076   if (RValueReferenceType *RT =
2077         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2078     return QualType(RT, 0);
2079 
2080   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
2081 
2082   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2083   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2084   QualType Canonical;
2085   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
2086     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
2087     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
2088 
2089     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2090     RValueReferenceType *NewIP =
2091       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2092     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2093   }
2094 
2095   RValueReferenceType *New
2096     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical);
2097   Types.push_back(New);
2098   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2099   return QualType(New, 0);
2100 }
2101 
2102 /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a
2103 /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class.
2104 QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const {
2105   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2106   // structure.
2107   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2108   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls);
2109 
2110   void *InsertPos = 0;
2111   if (MemberPointerType *PT =
2112       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2113     return QualType(PT, 0);
2114 
2115   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
2116   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2117   QualType Canonical;
2118   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2119     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls));
2120 
2121     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2122     MemberPointerType *NewIP =
2123       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2124     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2125   }
2126   MemberPointerType *New
2127     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical);
2128   Types.push_back(New);
2129   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2130   return QualType(New, 0);
2131 }
2132 
2133 /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an
2134 /// array of the specified element type.
2135 QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2136                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn,
2137                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2138                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const {
2139   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() ||
2140           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) &&
2141          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!");
2142 
2143   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for
2144   // the target.
2145   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn);
2146   ArySize =
2147     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy)));
2148 
2149   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2150   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2151 
2152   void *InsertPos = 0;
2153   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP =
2154       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2155     return QualType(ATP, 0);
2156 
2157   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't
2158   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2159   QualType Canon;
2160   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2161     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2162     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize,
2163                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2164     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2165 
2166     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2167     ConstantArrayType *NewIP =
2168       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2169     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2170   }
2171 
2172   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment)
2173     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2174   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2175   Types.push_back(New);
2176   return QualType(New, 0);
2177 }
2178 
2179 /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be
2180 /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known
2181 /// sizes replaced with [*].
2182 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const {
2183   // Vastly most common case.
2184   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type;
2185 
2186   QualType result;
2187 
2188   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
2189   const Type *ty = split.Ty;
2190   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) {
2191 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
2192 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
2193 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
2194 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
2195     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?");
2196 
2197   // These types should never be variably-modified.
2198   case Type::Builtin:
2199   case Type::Complex:
2200   case Type::Vector:
2201   case Type::ExtVector:
2202   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector:
2203   case Type::ObjCObject:
2204   case Type::ObjCInterface:
2205   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
2206   case Type::Record:
2207   case Type::Enum:
2208   case Type::UnresolvedUsing:
2209   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
2210   case Type::TypeOf:
2211   case Type::Decltype:
2212   case Type::UnaryTransform:
2213   case Type::DependentName:
2214   case Type::InjectedClassName:
2215   case Type::TemplateSpecialization:
2216   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization:
2217   case Type::TemplateTypeParm:
2218   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack:
2219   case Type::Auto:
2220   case Type::PackExpansion:
2221     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified");
2222 
2223   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to
2224   // further decay.
2225   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
2226   case Type::FunctionProto:
2227   case Type::BlockPointer:
2228   case Type::MemberPointer:
2229     return type;
2230 
2231   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications
2232   // preserve structure except as noted by comments.
2233   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op
2234   // optimizations available here.
2235   case Type::Pointer:
2236     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(
2237                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType()));
2238     break;
2239 
2240   case Type::LValueReference: {
2241     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty);
2242     result = getLValueReferenceType(
2243                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()),
2244                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue());
2245     break;
2246   }
2247 
2248   case Type::RValueReference: {
2249     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty);
2250     result = getRValueReferenceType(
2251                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()));
2252     break;
2253   }
2254 
2255   case Type::Atomic: {
2256     const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty);
2257     result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType()));
2258     break;
2259   }
2260 
2261   case Type::ConstantArray: {
2262     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty);
2263     result = getConstantArrayType(
2264                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()),
2265                                   cat->getSize(),
2266                                   cat->getSizeModifier(),
2267                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers());
2268     break;
2269   }
2270 
2271   case Type::DependentSizedArray: {
2272     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty);
2273     result = getDependentSizedArrayType(
2274                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()),
2275                                         dat->getSizeExpr(),
2276                                         dat->getSizeModifier(),
2277                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2278                                         dat->getBracketsRange());
2279     break;
2280   }
2281 
2282   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types.
2283   case Type::IncompleteArray: {
2284     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty);
2285     result = getVariableArrayType(
2286                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()),
2287                                   /*size*/ 0,
2288                                   ArrayType::Normal,
2289                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2290                                   SourceRange());
2291     break;
2292   }
2293 
2294   // Turn VLA types into [*] types.
2295   case Type::VariableArray: {
2296     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty);
2297     result = getVariableArrayType(
2298                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()),
2299                                   /*size*/ 0,
2300                                   ArrayType::Star,
2301                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2302                                   vat->getBracketsRange());
2303     break;
2304   }
2305   }
2306 
2307   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original.
2308   return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals);
2309 }
2310 
2311 /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a
2312 /// variable array of the specified element type.
2313 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2314                                           Expr *NumElts,
2315                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2316                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals,
2317                                           SourceRange Brackets) const {
2318   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's
2319   // that have an expression provided for their size.
2320   QualType Canon;
2321 
2322   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type.
2323   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2324     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2325     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM,
2326                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2327     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2328   }
2329 
2330   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2331     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2332 
2333   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New);
2334   Types.push_back(New);
2335   return QualType(New, 0);
2336 }
2337 
2338 /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to
2339 /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element
2340 /// type.
2341 QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,
2342                                                 Expr *numElements,
2343                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2344                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals,
2345                                                 SourceRange brackets) const {
2346   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||
2347           numElements->isValueDependent()) &&
2348          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!");
2349 
2350   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number
2351   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent
2352   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay
2353   // because they can't be used in most locations.
2354   if (!numElements) {
2355     DependentSizedArrayType *newType
2356       = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2357           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(),
2358                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2359                                   brackets);
2360     Types.push_back(newType);
2361     return QualType(newType, 0);
2362   }
2363 
2364   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we
2365   // also build a canonical type.
2366 
2367   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2368 
2369   void *insertPos = 0;
2370   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2371   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this,
2372                                    QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2373                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements);
2374 
2375   // Look for an existing type with these properties.
2376   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy =
2377     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2378 
2379   // If we don't have one, build one.
2380   if (!canonTy) {
2381     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2382       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2383                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2384                               brackets);
2385     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos);
2386     Types.push_back(canonTy);
2387   }
2388 
2389   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array.
2390   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0),
2391                                     canonElementType.Quals);
2392 
2393   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type,
2394   // then just use that as our result.
2395   if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType)
2396     return canon;
2397 
2398   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling
2399   // of the element type.
2400   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType
2401     = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2402         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements,
2403                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets);
2404   Types.push_back(sugaredType);
2405   return QualType(sugaredType, 0);
2406 }
2407 
2408 QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,
2409                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2410                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const {
2411   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2412   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2413 
2414   void *insertPos = 0;
2415   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat =
2416        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos))
2417     return QualType(iat, 0);
2418 
2419   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2420   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull
2421   // qualifiers off the element type.
2422   QualType canon;
2423 
2424   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2425     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2426     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0),
2427                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2428     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2429 
2430     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2431     IncompleteArrayType *existing =
2432       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2433     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing;
2434   }
2435 
2436   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2437     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2438 
2439   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos);
2440   Types.push_back(newType);
2441   return QualType(newType, 0);
2442 }
2443 
2444 /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of
2445 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2446 QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts,
2447                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const {
2448   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType());
2449 
2450   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2451   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2452   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind);
2453 
2454   void *InsertPos = 0;
2455   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2456     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2457 
2458   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2459   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2460   QualType Canonical;
2461   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2462     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind);
2463 
2464     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2465     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2466     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2467   }
2468   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2469     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind);
2470   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2471   Types.push_back(New);
2472   return QualType(New, 0);
2473 }
2474 
2475 /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of
2476 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2477 QualType
2478 ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const {
2479   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType());
2480 
2481   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2482   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2483   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector,
2484                       VectorType::GenericVector);
2485   void *InsertPos = 0;
2486   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2487     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2488 
2489   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2490   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2491   QualType Canonical;
2492   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2493     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts);
2494 
2495     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2496     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2497     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2498   }
2499   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2500     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical);
2501   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2502   Types.push_back(New);
2503   return QualType(New, 0);
2504 }
2505 
2506 QualType
2507 ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,
2508                                            Expr *SizeExpr,
2509                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const {
2510   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2511   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType),
2512                                        SizeExpr);
2513 
2514   void *InsertPos = 0;
2515   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon
2516     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2517   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New;
2518   if (Canon) {
2519     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as
2520     // the canonical type for a newly-built type.
2521     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2522       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0),
2523                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2524   } else {
2525     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType);
2526     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) {
2527       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2528         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr,
2529                                     AttrLoc);
2530 
2531       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck
2532         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2533       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken");
2534       (void)CanonCheck;
2535       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2536     } else {
2537       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr,
2538                                                       SourceLocation());
2539       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2540         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2541     }
2542   }
2543 
2544   Types.push_back(New);
2545   return QualType(New, 0);
2546 }
2547 
2548 /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'.
2549 ///
2550 QualType
2551 ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,
2552                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const {
2553   const CallingConv DefaultCC = Info.getCC();
2554   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2555                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2556   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2557   // structure.
2558   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2559   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info);
2560 
2561   void *InsertPos = 0;
2562   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT =
2563         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2564     return QualType(FT, 0);
2565 
2566   QualType Canonical;
2567   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() ||
2568       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2569     Canonical =
2570       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2571                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)));
2572 
2573     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2574     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP =
2575       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2576     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2577   }
2578 
2579   FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2580   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2581     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo);
2582   Types.push_back(New);
2583   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2584   return QualType(New, 0);
2585 }
2586 
2587 /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument
2588 /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'.
2589 QualType
2590 ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy,
2591                             const QualType *ArgArray, unsigned NumArgs,
2592                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const {
2593   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2594   // structure.
2595   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2596   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, EPI, *this);
2597 
2598   void *InsertPos = 0;
2599   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP =
2600         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2601     return QualType(FTP, 0);
2602 
2603   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not.
2604   bool isCanonical =
2605     EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && ResultTy.isCanonical() &&
2606     !EPI.HasTrailingReturn;
2607   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i)
2608     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam())
2609       isCanonical = false;
2610 
2611   const CallingConv DefaultCC = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC();
2612   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2613                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2614 
2615   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it.
2616   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type.
2617   QualType Canonical;
2618   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2619     SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs;
2620     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2621     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2622       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i]));
2623 
2624     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI;
2625     CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false;
2626     CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None;
2627     CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0;
2628     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo
2629       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv));
2630 
2631     Canonical = getFunctionType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2632                                 CanonicalArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2633                                 CanonicalEPI);
2634 
2635     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2636     FunctionProtoType *NewIP =
2637       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2638     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2639   }
2640 
2641   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after
2642   // them for three variable size arrays at the end:
2643   //  - parameter types
2644   //  - exception types
2645   //  - consumed-arguments flags
2646   // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept
2647   // expression, or information used to resolve the exception
2648   // specification.
2649   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) +
2650                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType);
2651   if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) {
2652     Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType);
2653   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) {
2654     Size += sizeof(Expr*);
2655   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) {
2656     Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2657   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) {
2658     Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2659   }
2660   if (EPI.ConsumedArguments)
2661     Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool);
2662 
2663   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
2664   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI;
2665   newEPI.ExtInfo = EPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2666   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, Canonical, newEPI);
2667   Types.push_back(FTP);
2668   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos);
2669   return QualType(FTP, 0);
2670 }
2671 
2672 #ifndef NDEBUG
2673 static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) {
2674   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false;
2675   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D);
2676   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2677     return true;
2678   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() &&
2679       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2680     return true;
2681   return false;
2682 }
2683 #endif
2684 
2685 /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the
2686 /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration.
2687 QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl,
2688                                               QualType TST) const {
2689   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl));
2690   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) {
2691     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2692   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) {
2693     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type");
2694     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
2695     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2696   } else {
2697     Type *newType =
2698       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST);
2699     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2700     Types.push_back(newType);
2701   }
2702   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2703 }
2704 
2705 /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2706 /// specified type declaration.
2707 QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const {
2708   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param");
2709   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case");
2710 
2711   if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl))
2712     return getTypedefType(Typedef);
2713 
2714   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) &&
2715          "Template type parameter types are always available.");
2716 
2717   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) {
2718     assert(!Record->getPreviousDecl() &&
2719            "struct/union has previous declaration");
2720     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record));
2721     return getRecordType(Record);
2722   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) {
2723     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDecl() &&
2724            "enum has previous declaration");
2725     return getEnumType(Enum);
2726   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using =
2727                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) {
2728     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using);
2729     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2730     Types.push_back(newType);
2731   } else
2732     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?");
2733 
2734   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2735 }
2736 
2737 /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2738 /// specified typedef name decl.
2739 QualType
2740 ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl,
2741                            QualType Canonical) const {
2742   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2743 
2744   if (Canonical.isNull())
2745     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType());
2746   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2747     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical);
2748   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2749   Types.push_back(newType);
2750   return QualType(newType, 0);
2751 }
2752 
2753 QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const {
2754   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2755 
2756   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2757     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2758       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2759 
2760   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl);
2761   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2762   Types.push_back(newType);
2763   return QualType(newType, 0);
2764 }
2765 
2766 QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const {
2767   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2768 
2769   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2770     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2771       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2772 
2773   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl);
2774   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2775   Types.push_back(newType);
2776   return QualType(newType, 0);
2777 }
2778 
2779 QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,
2780                                        QualType modifiedType,
2781                                        QualType equivalentType) {
2782   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id;
2783   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2784 
2785   void *insertPos = 0;
2786   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos);
2787   if (type) return QualType(type, 0);
2788 
2789   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType);
2790   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2791            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2792 
2793   Types.push_back(type);
2794   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos);
2795 
2796   return QualType(type, 0);
2797 }
2798 
2799 
2800 /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type.
2801 QualType
2802 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2803                                          QualType Replacement) const {
2804   assert(Replacement.isCanonical()
2805          && "replacement types must always be canonical");
2806 
2807   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2808   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement);
2809   void *InsertPos = 0;
2810   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm
2811     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2812 
2813   if (!SubstParm) {
2814     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2815       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement);
2816     Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2817     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2818   }
2819 
2820   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2821 }
2822 
2823 /// \brief Retrieve a
2824 QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(
2825                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2826                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) {
2827 #ifndef NDEBUG
2828   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),
2829                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end();
2830        P != PEnd; ++P) {
2831     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type");
2832     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type");
2833   }
2834 #endif
2835 
2836   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2837   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack);
2838   void *InsertPos = 0;
2839   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2840         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2841     return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2842 
2843   QualType Canon;
2844   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2845     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0));
2846     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon),
2847                                              ArgPack);
2848     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2849   }
2850 
2851   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2852     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon,
2853                                                                ArgPack);
2854   Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2855   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2856   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2857 }
2858 
2859 /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template
2860 /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally)
2861 /// name.
2862 QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index,
2863                                              bool ParameterPack,
2864                                              TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const {
2865   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2866   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl);
2867   void *InsertPos = 0;
2868   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm
2869     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2870 
2871   if (TypeParm)
2872     return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2873 
2874   if (TTPDecl) {
2875     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2876     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon);
2877 
2878     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck
2879       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2880     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken");
2881     (void)TypeCheck;
2882   } else
2883     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2884       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2885 
2886   Types.push_back(TypeParm);
2887   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos);
2888 
2889   return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2890 }
2891 
2892 TypeSourceInfo *
2893 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,
2894                                               SourceLocation NameLoc,
2895                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2896                                               QualType Underlying) const {
2897   assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2898          "No dependent template names here!");
2899   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying);
2900 
2901   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST);
2902   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL
2903     = cast<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(DI->getTypeLoc());
2904   TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation());
2905   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc);
2906   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc());
2907   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc());
2908   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i)
2909     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo());
2910   return DI;
2911 }
2912 
2913 QualType
2914 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2915                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2916                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2917   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2918          "No dependent template names here!");
2919 
2920   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size();
2921 
2922   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec;
2923   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs);
2924   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2925     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument());
2926 
2927   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs,
2928                                        Underlying);
2929 }
2930 
2931 #ifndef NDEBUG
2932 static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args,
2933                                  unsigned NumArgs) {
2934   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2935     if (Args[I].isPackExpansion())
2936       return true;
2937 
2938   return true;
2939 }
2940 #endif
2941 
2942 QualType
2943 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2944                                           const TemplateArgument *Args,
2945                                           unsigned NumArgs,
2946                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2947   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2948          "No dependent template names here!");
2949   // Look through qualified template names.
2950   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2951     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2952 
2953   bool IsTypeAlias =
2954     Template.getAsTemplateDecl() &&
2955     isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl());
2956   QualType CanonType;
2957   if (!Underlying.isNull())
2958     CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying);
2959   else {
2960     // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains
2961     // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack.
2962     assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) &&
2963            "Caller must compute aliased type");
2964     IsTypeAlias = false;
2965     CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args,
2966                                                        NumArgs);
2967   }
2968 
2969   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't
2970   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that
2971   // we don't unique and don't want to lose.
2972   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2973                        sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs +
2974                        (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0),
2975                        TypeAlignment);
2976   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2977     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType,
2978                                          IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType());
2979 
2980   Types.push_back(Spec);
2981   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2982 }
2983 
2984 QualType
2985 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2986                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args,
2987                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const {
2988   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2989          "No dependent template names here!");
2990 
2991   // Look through qualified template names.
2992   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2993     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2994 
2995   // Build the canonical template specialization type.
2996   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template);
2997   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs;
2998   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2999   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
3000     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]));
3001 
3002   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already
3003   // exists.
3004   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3005   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate,
3006                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this);
3007 
3008   void *InsertPos = 0;
3009   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
3010     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3011 
3012   if (!Spec) {
3013     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type.
3014     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
3015                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3016                          TypeAlignment);
3017     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate,
3018                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs,
3019                                                 QualType(), QualType());
3020     Types.push_back(Spec);
3021     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos);
3022   }
3023 
3024   assert(Spec->isDependentType() &&
3025          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type");
3026   return QualType(Spec, 0);
3027 }
3028 
3029 QualType
3030 ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3031                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3032                               QualType NamedType) const {
3033   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3034   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType);
3035 
3036   void *InsertPos = 0;
3037   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3038   if (T)
3039     return QualType(T, 0);
3040 
3041   QualType Canon = NamedType;
3042   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
3043     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType);
3044     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3045     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken");
3046     (void)CheckT;
3047   }
3048 
3049   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon);
3050   Types.push_back(T);
3051   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3052   return QualType(T, 0);
3053 }
3054 
3055 QualType
3056 ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const {
3057   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3058   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType);
3059 
3060   void *InsertPos = 0;
3061   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3062   if (T)
3063     return QualType(T, 0);
3064 
3065   QualType Canon = InnerType;
3066   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
3067     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType);
3068     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3069     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken");
3070     (void)CheckT;
3071   }
3072 
3073   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon);
3074   Types.push_back(T);
3075   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3076   return QualType(T, 0);
3077 }
3078 
3079 QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3080                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3081                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3082                                           QualType Canon) const {
3083   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
3084 
3085   if (Canon.isNull()) {
3086     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
3087     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
3088     if (Keyword == ETK_None)
3089       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
3090 
3091     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword)
3092       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name);
3093   }
3094 
3095   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3096   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name);
3097 
3098   void *InsertPos = 0;
3099   DependentNameType *T
3100     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3101   if (T)
3102     return QualType(T, 0);
3103 
3104   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon);
3105   Types.push_back(T);
3106   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3107   return QualType(T, 0);
3108 }
3109 
3110 QualType
3111 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3112                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3113                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3114                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3115                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const {
3116   // TODO: avoid this copy
3117   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy;
3118   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I)
3119     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument());
3120   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name,
3121                                                 ArgCopy.size(),
3122                                                 ArgCopy.data());
3123 }
3124 
3125 QualType
3126 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3127                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3128                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3129                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3130                                  unsigned NumArgs,
3131                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const {
3132   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
3133          "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
3134 
3135   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3136   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS,
3137                                                Name, NumArgs, Args);
3138 
3139   void *InsertPos = 0;
3140   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T
3141     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3142   if (T)
3143     return QualType(T, 0);
3144 
3145   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
3146 
3147   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
3148   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
3149 
3150   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false;
3151   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs);
3152   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) {
3153     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]);
3154     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I]))
3155       AnyNonCanonArgs = true;
3156   }
3157 
3158   QualType Canon;
3159   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) {
3160     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS,
3161                                                    Name, NumArgs,
3162                                                    CanonArgs.data());
3163 
3164     // Find the insert position again.
3165     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3166   }
3167 
3168   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) +
3169                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3170                        TypeAlignment);
3171   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS,
3172                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon);
3173   Types.push_back(T);
3174   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3175   return QualType(T, 0);
3176 }
3177 
3178 QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,
3179                                       llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) {
3180   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3181   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions);
3182 
3183   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() &&
3184          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs");
3185   void *InsertPos = 0;
3186   PackExpansionType *T
3187     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3188   if (T)
3189     return QualType(T, 0);
3190 
3191   QualType Canon;
3192   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) {
3193     Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern);
3194     // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it
3195     // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its
3196     // parameters.
3197     if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) {
3198       Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions);
3199 
3200       // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into
3201       // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position.
3202       PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3203     }
3204   }
3205 
3206   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions);
3207   Types.push_back(T);
3208   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3209   return QualType(T, 0);
3210 }
3211 
3212 /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols
3213 /// alphabetically.
3214 static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS,
3215                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) {
3216   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName();
3217 }
3218 
3219 static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3220                                 unsigned NumProtocols) {
3221   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true;
3222 
3223   if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0])
3224     return false;
3225 
3226   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i)
3227     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) ||
3228         Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i])
3229       return false;
3230   return true;
3231 }
3232 
3233 static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols,
3234                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) {
3235   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols;
3236 
3237   // Sort protocols, keyed by name.
3238   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames);
3239 
3240   // Canonicalize.
3241   for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I)
3242     Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl();
3243 
3244   // Remove duplicates.
3245   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd);
3246   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols;
3247 }
3248 
3249 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,
3250                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3251                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const {
3252   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols
3253   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine.
3254   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType))
3255     return BaseType;
3256 
3257   // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3258   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3259   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3260   void *InsertPos = 0;
3261   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3262     return QualType(QT, 0);
3263 
3264   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and
3265   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols.
3266   QualType Canonical;
3267   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols);
3268   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) {
3269     if (!ProtocolsSorted) {
3270       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols,
3271                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols);
3272       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols;
3273 
3274       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3275       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3276                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3277     } else {
3278       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3279                                     Protocols, NumProtocols);
3280     }
3281 
3282     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3283     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3284   }
3285 
3286   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl);
3287   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *);
3288   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
3289   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T =
3290     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3291 
3292   Types.push_back(T);
3293   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3294   return QualType(T, 0);
3295 }
3296 
3297 /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for
3298 /// the given object type.
3299 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const {
3300   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3301   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT);
3302 
3303   void *InsertPos = 0;
3304   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT =
3305               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3306     return QualType(QT, 0);
3307 
3308   // Find the canonical object type.
3309   QualType Canonical;
3310   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) {
3311     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT));
3312 
3313     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3314     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3315   }
3316 
3317   // No match.
3318   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment);
3319   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType =
3320     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT);
3321 
3322   Types.push_back(QType);
3323   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos);
3324   return QualType(QType, 0);
3325 }
3326 
3327 /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3328 /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional.
3329 QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl,
3330                                           ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const {
3331   if (Decl->TypeForDecl)
3332     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3333 
3334   if (PrevDecl) {
3335     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl");
3336     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
3337     return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3338   }
3339 
3340   // Prefer the definition, if there is one.
3341   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition())
3342     Decl = Def;
3343 
3344   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment);
3345   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
3346   Decl->TypeForDecl = T;
3347   Types.push_back(T);
3348   return QualType(T, 0);
3349 }
3350 
3351 /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique
3352 /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example,
3353 /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different
3354 /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3355 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3356 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const {
3357   TypeOfExprType *toe;
3358   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
3359     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3360     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr);
3361 
3362     void *InsertPos = 0;
3363     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon
3364       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3365     if (Canon) {
3366       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent
3367       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type.
3368       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr,
3369                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0));
3370     } else {
3371       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3372       Canon
3373         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr);
3374       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3375       toe = Canon;
3376     }
3377   } else {
3378     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType());
3379     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical);
3380   }
3381   Types.push_back(toe);
3382   return QualType(toe, 0);
3383 }
3384 
3385 /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3386 /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3387 /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3388 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3389 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3390 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const {
3391   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType);
3392   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical);
3393   Types.push_back(tot);
3394   return QualType(tot, 0);
3395 }
3396 
3397 
3398 /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3399 /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3400 /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3401 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3402 /// on canonical types (which are always unique).
3403 QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const {
3404   DecltypeType *dt;
3405 
3406   // C++0x [temp.type]p2:
3407   //   If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a
3408   //   unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same
3409   //   type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1).
3410   if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) {
3411     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3412     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e);
3413 
3414     void *InsertPos = 0;
3415     DependentDecltypeType *Canon
3416       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3417     if (Canon) {
3418       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent
3419       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type.
3420       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3421                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0));
3422     } else {
3423       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3424       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e);
3425       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3426       dt = Canon;
3427     }
3428   } else {
3429     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3430                                       getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3431   }
3432   Types.push_back(dt);
3433   return QualType(dt, 0);
3434 }
3435 
3436 /// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory
3437 /// savings are minimal and these are rare.
3438 QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,
3439                                            QualType UnderlyingType,
3440                                            UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind)
3441     const {
3442   UnaryTransformType *Ty =
3443     new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType,
3444                                                    Kind,
3445                                  UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ?
3446                                  QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3447   Types.push_back(Ty);
3448   return QualType(Ty, 0);
3449 }
3450 
3451 /// getAutoType - We only unique auto types after they've been deduced.
3452 QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const {
3453   void *InsertPos = 0;
3454   if (!DeducedType.isNull()) {
3455     // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3456     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3457     AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType);
3458     if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3459       return QualType(AT, 0);
3460   }
3461 
3462   AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType);
3463   Types.push_back(AT);
3464   if (InsertPos)
3465     AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos);
3466   return QualType(AT, 0);
3467 }
3468 
3469 /// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for
3470 /// the given value type.
3471 QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const {
3472   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
3473   // structure.
3474   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3475   AtomicType::Profile(ID, T);
3476 
3477   void *InsertPos = 0;
3478   if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3479     return QualType(AT, 0);
3480 
3481   // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
3482   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
3483   QualType Canonical;
3484   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
3485     Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T));
3486 
3487     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
3488     AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3489     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
3490   }
3491   AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical);
3492   Types.push_back(New);
3493   AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
3494   return QualType(New, 0);
3495 }
3496 
3497 /// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'.
3498 QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const {
3499   if (AutoDeductTy.isNull())
3500     AutoDeductTy = getAutoType(QualType());
3501   assert(!AutoDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto' pattern");
3502   return AutoDeductTy;
3503 }
3504 
3505 /// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'.
3506 QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const {
3507   if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull())
3508     AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType());
3509   assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern");
3510   return AutoRRefDeductTy;
3511 }
3512 
3513 /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3514 /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl.
3515 QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const {
3516   assert (Decl);
3517   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting
3518   // away const?  mutable?
3519   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl));
3520 }
3521 
3522 /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result
3523 /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and
3524 /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>.
3525 CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const {
3526   return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType());
3527 }
3528 
3529 /// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3530 CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const {
3531   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType());
3532 }
3533 
3534 /// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3535 CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const {
3536   return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType());
3537 }
3538 
3539 /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t".
3540 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3541 QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const {
3542   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3543   return WCharTy;
3544 }
3545 
3546 /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t".
3547 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3548 QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const {
3549   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3550   return UnsignedIntTy;
3551 }
3552 
3553 /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17)
3554 /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9).
3555 QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const {
3556   return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0));
3557 }
3558 
3559 /// \brief Return the unique type for "pid_t" defined in
3560 /// <sys/types.h>. We need this to compute the correct type for vfork().
3561 QualType ASTContext::getProcessIDType() const {
3562   return getFromTargetType(Target->getProcessIDType());
3563 }
3564 
3565 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3566 //                              Type Operators
3567 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3568 
3569 CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const {
3570   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining
3571   // qualifiers.
3572   T = getCanonicalType(T);
3573   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3574   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr();
3575   QualType Result;
3576   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) {
3577     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0));
3578   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) {
3579     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0));
3580   } else {
3581     Result = QualType(Ty, 0);
3582   }
3583 
3584   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result);
3585 }
3586 
3587 QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,
3588                                              Qualifiers &quals) {
3589   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType();
3590 
3591   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to
3592   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor.
3593   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with
3594   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly.
3595   const ArrayType *AT =
3596     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType());
3597 
3598   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType.
3599   if (!AT) {
3600     quals = splitType.Quals;
3601     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3602   }
3603 
3604   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type.
3605   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType();
3606   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals);
3607 
3608   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we
3609   // can just use the results in splitType.
3610   if (elementType == unqualElementType) {
3611     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call
3612     quals = splitType.Quals;
3613     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3614   }
3615 
3616   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then
3617   // build the type back up.
3618   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals);
3619 
3620   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
3621     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(),
3622                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3623   }
3624 
3625   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) {
3626     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3627   }
3628 
3629   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) {
3630     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType,
3631                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3632                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3633                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3634                                 VAT->getBracketsRange());
3635   }
3636 
3637   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT);
3638   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3639                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0,
3640                                     SourceRange());
3641 }
3642 
3643 /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that
3644 /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that
3645 /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types
3646 /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this
3647 /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level
3648 /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically
3649 /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and
3650 /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level.
3651 bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) {
3652   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(),
3653                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>();
3654   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) {
3655     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType();
3656     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType();
3657     return true;
3658   }
3659 
3660   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(),
3661                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>();
3662   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&
3663       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),
3664                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) {
3665     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType();
3666     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType();
3667     return true;
3668   }
3669 
3670   if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) {
3671     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
3672                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
3673     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) {
3674       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType();
3675       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType();
3676       return true;
3677     }
3678   }
3679 
3680   // FIXME: Block pointers, too?
3681 
3682   return false;
3683 }
3684 
3685 DeclarationNameInfo
3686 ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,
3687                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const {
3688   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3689   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3690   case TemplateName::Template:
3691     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3692     return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(),
3693                                NameLoc);
3694 
3695   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: {
3696     OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate();
3697     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3698     return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc);
3699   }
3700 
3701   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3702     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3703     DeclarationName DName;
3704     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) {
3705       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier());
3706       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc);
3707     } else {
3708       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator());
3709       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations?
3710       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc;
3711       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3712       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3713       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc);
3714     }
3715   }
3716 
3717   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3718     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3719       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3720     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(),
3721                                NameLoc);
3722   }
3723 
3724   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3725     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3726       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3727     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(),
3728                                NameLoc);
3729   }
3730   }
3731 
3732   llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!");
3733 }
3734 
3735 TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const {
3736   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3737   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3738   case TemplateName::Template: {
3739     TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl();
3740     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP
3741           = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template))
3742       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP);
3743 
3744     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration.
3745     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl()));
3746   }
3747 
3748   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate:
3749     llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template");
3750 
3751   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3752     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3753     assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls.");
3754     return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName;
3755   }
3756 
3757   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3758     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3759       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3760     return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement());
3761   }
3762 
3763   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3764     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3765                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3766     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter
3767       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack());
3768     TemplateArgument canonArgPack
3769       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack());
3770     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack);
3771   }
3772   }
3773 
3774   llvm_unreachable("bad template name!");
3775 }
3776 
3777 bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) {
3778   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X);
3779   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y);
3780   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer();
3781 }
3782 
3783 TemplateArgument
3784 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const {
3785   switch (Arg.getKind()) {
3786     case TemplateArgument::Null:
3787       return Arg;
3788 
3789     case TemplateArgument::Expression:
3790       return Arg;
3791 
3792     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: {
3793       ValueDecl *D = cast<ValueDecl>(Arg.getAsDecl()->getCanonicalDecl());
3794       return TemplateArgument(D, Arg.isDeclForReferenceParam());
3795     }
3796 
3797     case TemplateArgument::NullPtr:
3798       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getNullPtrType()),
3799                               /*isNullPtr*/true);
3800 
3801     case TemplateArgument::Template:
3802       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate()));
3803 
3804     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion:
3805       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(
3806                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()),
3807                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions());
3808 
3809     case TemplateArgument::Integral:
3810       return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType()));
3811 
3812     case TemplateArgument::Type:
3813       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType()));
3814 
3815     case TemplateArgument::Pack: {
3816       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0)
3817         return Arg;
3818 
3819       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs
3820         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()];
3821       unsigned Idx = 0;
3822       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(),
3823                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end();
3824            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx)
3825         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A);
3826 
3827       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size());
3828     }
3829   }
3830 
3831   // Silence GCC warning
3832   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind");
3833 }
3834 
3835 NestedNameSpecifier *
3836 ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const {
3837   if (!NNS)
3838     return 0;
3839 
3840   switch (NNS->getKind()) {
3841   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier:
3842     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same.
3843     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this,
3844                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()),
3845                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier());
3846 
3847   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace:
3848     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3849     // this namespace and no prefix.
3850     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3851                                  NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace());
3852 
3853   case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias:
3854     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3855     // this namespace and no prefix.
3856     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3857                                     NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace()
3858                                                       ->getOriginalNamespace());
3859 
3860   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec:
3861   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: {
3862     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0));
3863 
3864     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"),
3865     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those
3866     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize
3867     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name
3868     // types, e.g.,
3869     //   typedef typename T::type T1;
3870     //   typedef typename T1::type T2;
3871     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>())
3872       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(),
3873                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier()));
3874 
3875     // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec.
3876     // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the
3877     // first place?
3878     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false,
3879                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr()));
3880   }
3881 
3882   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global:
3883     // The global specifier is canonical and unique.
3884     return NNS;
3885   }
3886 
3887   llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!");
3888 }
3889 
3890 
3891 const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const {
3892   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently.
3893   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
3894     // Handle the common positive case fast.
3895     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T))
3896       return AT;
3897   }
3898 
3899   // Handle the common negative case fast.
3900   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType()))
3901     return 0;
3902 
3903   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This
3904   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes
3905   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type."
3906 
3907   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have
3908   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type
3909   // we must propagate them down into the element type.
3910 
3911   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType();
3912   Qualifiers qs = split.Quals;
3913 
3914   // If we have a simple case, just return now.
3915   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty);
3916   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty())
3917     return ATy;
3918 
3919   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the
3920   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type.
3921   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs);
3922 
3923   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy))
3924     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(),
3925                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(),
3926                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3927   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy))
3928     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy,
3929                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(),
3930                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3931 
3932   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT
3933         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy))
3934     return cast<ArrayType>(
3935                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy,
3936                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3937                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(),
3938                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3939                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange()));
3940 
3941   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy);
3942   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy,
3943                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3944                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3945                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3946                                               VAT->getBracketsRange()));
3947 }
3948 
3949 QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const {
3950   // C99 6.7.5.3p7:
3951   //   A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be
3952   //   adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type
3953   //   qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of
3954   //   the array type derivation.
3955   if (T->isArrayType())
3956     return getArrayDecayedType(T);
3957 
3958   // C99 6.7.5.3p8:
3959   //   A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type"
3960   //   shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as
3961   //   in 6.3.2.1.
3962   if (T->isFunctionType())
3963     return getPointerType(T);
3964 
3965   return T;
3966 }
3967 
3968 QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const {
3969   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3970   T = getAdjustedParameterType(T);
3971   return T.getUnqualifiedType();
3972 }
3973 
3974 /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the
3975 /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when
3976 /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type,
3977 /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array.
3978 ///
3979 /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3.
3980 QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const {
3981   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any
3982   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation
3983   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present
3984   // (C99 6.7.3p8).
3985   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty);
3986   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!");
3987 
3988   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType());
3989 
3990   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict
3991   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers());
3992 }
3993 
3994 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const {
3995   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType());
3996 }
3997 
3998 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const {
3999   Qualifiers qs;
4000   while (true) {
4001     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
4002     const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe();
4003     if (!array) break;
4004 
4005     type = array->getElementType();
4006     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals);
4007   }
4008 
4009   return getQualifiedType(type, qs);
4010 }
4011 
4012 /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements.
4013 uint64_t
4014 ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const {
4015   uint64_t ElementCount = 1;
4016   do {
4017     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue();
4018     CA = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantArrayType>(
4019       CA->getElementType()->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe());
4020   } while (CA);
4021   return ElementCount;
4022 }
4023 
4024 /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types.
4025 /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float.
4026 static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) {
4027   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
4028     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType());
4029 
4030   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
4031   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
4032   default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
4033   case BuiltinType::Half:       return HalfRank;
4034   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank;
4035   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank;
4036   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank;
4037   }
4038 }
4039 
4040 /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating
4041 /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize).
4042 /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type.
4043 /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type.
4044 QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,
4045                                                        QualType Domain) const {
4046   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size);
4047   if (Domain->isComplexType()) {
4048     switch (EltRank) {
4049     case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported");
4050     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy;
4051     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy;
4052     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy;
4053     }
4054   }
4055 
4056   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!");
4057   switch (EltRank) {
4058   case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Half ranks are not valid here");
4059   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy;
4060   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy;
4061   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy;
4062   }
4063   llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank");
4064 }
4065 
4066 /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating
4067 /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' ==
4068 /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4069 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
4070 int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4071   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS);
4072   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS);
4073 
4074   if (LHSR == RHSR)
4075     return 0;
4076   if (LHSR > RHSR)
4077     return 1;
4078   return -1;
4079 }
4080 
4081 /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This
4082 /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum,
4083 /// or if it is not canonicalized.
4084 unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const {
4085   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized");
4086 
4087   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
4088   default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer");
4089   case BuiltinType::Bool:
4090     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3);
4091   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4092   case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4093   case BuiltinType::SChar:
4094   case BuiltinType::UChar:
4095     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3);
4096   case BuiltinType::Short:
4097   case BuiltinType::UShort:
4098     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3);
4099   case BuiltinType::Int:
4100   case BuiltinType::UInt:
4101     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3);
4102   case BuiltinType::Long:
4103   case BuiltinType::ULong:
4104     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3);
4105   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
4106   case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
4107     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3);
4108   case BuiltinType::Int128:
4109   case BuiltinType::UInt128:
4110     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3);
4111   }
4112 }
4113 
4114 /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according
4115 /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions).
4116 ///
4117 /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no
4118 /// promotion occurs.
4119 QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const {
4120   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent())
4121     return QualType();
4122 
4123   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField();
4124   if (!Field)
4125     return QualType();
4126 
4127   QualType FT = Field->getType();
4128 
4129   uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
4130   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
4131   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal
4132   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is.
4133   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int.
4134   if (BitWidth < IntSize)
4135     return IntTy;
4136 
4137   if (BitWidth == IntSize)
4138     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4139 
4140   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act
4141   // like the base type.
4142   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here
4143   // is ridiculous.
4144   return QualType();
4145 }
4146 
4147 /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will
4148 /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable
4149 /// integer type.
4150 QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const {
4151   assert(!Promotable.isNull());
4152   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType());
4153   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>())
4154     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
4155 
4156   if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4157     // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t
4158     // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following
4159     // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type:
4160     // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or
4161     // unsigned long long int [...]
4162     // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this?
4163     if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S ||
4164         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U ||
4165         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 ||
4166         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) {
4167       bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S;
4168       uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT);
4169       QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy,
4170                                   LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy };
4171       for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) {
4172         uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]);
4173         if (FromSize < ToSize ||
4174             (FromSize == ToSize &&
4175              FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType()))
4176           return PromoteTypes[Idx];
4177       }
4178       llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long");
4179     }
4180   }
4181 
4182   // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type.
4183   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType())
4184     return IntTy;
4185   uint64_t PromotableSize = getIntWidth(Promotable);
4186   uint64_t IntSize = getIntWidth(IntTy);
4187   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize);
4188   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4189 }
4190 
4191 /// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable
4192 /// type and returns its ownership.
4193 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const {
4194   while (!T.isNull()) {
4195     if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None)
4196       return T.getObjCLifetime();
4197     if (T->isArrayType())
4198       T = getBaseElementType(T);
4199     else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>())
4200       T = PT->getPointeeType();
4201     else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4202       T = RT->getPointeeType();
4203     else
4204       break;
4205   }
4206 
4207   return Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4208 }
4209 
4210 /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type:
4211 /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4212 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
4213 int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4214   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr();
4215   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr();
4216   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0;
4217 
4218   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4219   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4220 
4221   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC);
4222   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC);
4223 
4224   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned.
4225     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0;
4226     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1;
4227   }
4228 
4229   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa.
4230   if (LHSUnsigned) {
4231     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it.
4232     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank)
4233       return 1;
4234 
4235     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4236     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4237     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4238     return -1;
4239   }
4240 
4241   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it.
4242   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank)
4243     return -1;
4244 
4245   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4246   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4247   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4248   return 1;
4249 }
4250 
4251 static RecordDecl *
4252 CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK,
4253                  DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) {
4254   SourceLocation Loc;
4255   if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
4256     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4257   else
4258     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4259 }
4260 
4261 // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings.
4262 QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const {
4263   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) {
4264     CFConstantStringTypeDecl =
4265       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4266                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString"));
4267     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition();
4268 
4269     QualType FieldTypes[4];
4270 
4271     // const int *isa;
4272     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst());
4273     // int flags;
4274     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy;
4275     // const char *str;
4276     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst());
4277     // long length;
4278     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy;
4279 
4280     // Create fields
4281     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4282       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl,
4283                                            SourceLocation(),
4284                                            SourceLocation(), 0,
4285                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4286                                            /*BitWidth=*/0,
4287                                            /*Mutable=*/false,
4288                                            ICIS_NoInit);
4289       Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4290       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field);
4291     }
4292 
4293     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition();
4294   }
4295 
4296   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl);
4297 }
4298 
4299 QualType ASTContext::getObjCSuperType() const {
4300   if (ObjCSuperType.isNull()) {
4301     RecordDecl *ObjCSuperTypeDecl  =
4302       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get("objc_super"));
4303     TUDecl->addDecl(ObjCSuperTypeDecl);
4304     ObjCSuperType = getTagDeclType(ObjCSuperTypeDecl);
4305   }
4306   return ObjCSuperType;
4307 }
4308 
4309 void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) {
4310   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>();
4311   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType");
4312   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl();
4313 }
4314 
4315 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const {
4316   if (BlockDescriptorType)
4317     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4318 
4319   RecordDecl *T;
4320   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4321   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4322                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor"));
4323   T->startDefinition();
4324 
4325   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4326     UnsignedLongTy,
4327     UnsignedLongTy,
4328   };
4329 
4330   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4331     "reserved",
4332     "Size"
4333   };
4334 
4335   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) {
4336     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4337                                          SourceLocation(),
4338                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4339                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4340                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4341                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4342                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4343     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4344     T->addDecl(Field);
4345   }
4346 
4347   T->completeDefinition();
4348 
4349   BlockDescriptorType = T;
4350 
4351   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4352 }
4353 
4354 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const {
4355   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType)
4356     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4357 
4358   RecordDecl *T;
4359   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4360   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4361                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose"));
4362   T->startDefinition();
4363 
4364   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4365     UnsignedLongTy,
4366     UnsignedLongTy,
4367     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4368     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy)
4369   };
4370 
4371   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4372     "reserved",
4373     "Size",
4374     "CopyFuncPtr",
4375     "DestroyFuncPtr"
4376   };
4377 
4378   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4379     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4380                                          SourceLocation(),
4381                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4382                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4383                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4384                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4385                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4386     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4387     T->addDecl(Field);
4388   }
4389 
4390   T->completeDefinition();
4391 
4392   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T;
4393 
4394   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4395 }
4396 
4397 /// BlockRequiresCopying - Returns true if byref variable "D" of type "Ty"
4398 /// requires copy/dispose. Note that this must match the logic
4399 /// in buildByrefHelpers.
4400 bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty,
4401                                       const VarDecl *D) {
4402   if (const CXXRecordDecl *record = Ty->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) {
4403     const Expr *copyExpr = getBlockVarCopyInits(D);
4404     if (!copyExpr && record->hasTrivialDestructor()) return false;
4405 
4406     return true;
4407   }
4408 
4409   if (!Ty->isObjCRetainableType()) return false;
4410 
4411   Qualifiers qs = Ty.getQualifiers();
4412 
4413   // If we have lifetime, that dominates.
4414   if (Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime = qs.getObjCLifetime()) {
4415     assert(getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount);
4416 
4417     switch (lifetime) {
4418       case Qualifiers::OCL_None: llvm_unreachable("impossible");
4419 
4420       // These are just bits as far as the runtime is concerned.
4421       case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone:
4422       case Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing:
4423         return false;
4424 
4425       // Tell the runtime that this is ARC __weak, called by the
4426       // byref routines.
4427       case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak:
4428       // ARC __strong __block variables need to be retained.
4429       case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong:
4430         return true;
4431     }
4432     llvm_unreachable("fell out of lifetime switch!");
4433   }
4434   return (Ty->isBlockPointerType() || isObjCNSObjectType(Ty) ||
4435           Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType());
4436 }
4437 
4438 bool ASTContext::getByrefLifetime(QualType Ty,
4439                               Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime &LifeTime,
4440                               bool &HasByrefExtendedLayout) const {
4441 
4442   if (!getLangOpts().ObjC1 ||
4443       getLangOpts().getGC() != LangOptions::NonGC)
4444     return false;
4445 
4446   HasByrefExtendedLayout = false;
4447   if (Ty->isRecordType()) {
4448     HasByrefExtendedLayout = true;
4449     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4450   }
4451   else if (getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount)
4452     LifeTime = Ty.getObjCLifetime();
4453   // MRR.
4454   else if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
4455     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone;
4456   else
4457     LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4458   return true;
4459 }
4460 
4461 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() {
4462   if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl)
4463     ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this,
4464                                                getTranslationUnitDecl(),
4465                                                SourceLocation(),
4466                                                SourceLocation(),
4467                                                &Idents.get("instancetype"),
4468                                      getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType()));
4469   return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl;
4470 }
4471 
4472 // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL:
4473 // typedef <type> BOOL;
4474 static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) {
4475   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T))
4476     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier())
4477       return II->isStr("BOOL");
4478 
4479   return false;
4480 }
4481 
4482 /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding
4483 /// purpose.
4484 CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const {
4485   if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType())
4486     return CharUnits::Zero();
4487 
4488   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type);
4489 
4490   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int
4491   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType())
4492     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy));
4493   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in.
4494   else if (type->isArrayType())
4495     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4496   return sz;
4497 }
4498 
4499 static inline
4500 std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) {
4501   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity());
4502 }
4503 
4504 /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block
4505 /// declaration.
4506 std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const {
4507   std::string S;
4508 
4509   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl();
4510   QualType BlockTy =
4511       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4512   // Encode result type.
4513   if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig)
4514     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None,
4515                             BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(),
4516                             S, true /*Extended*/);
4517   else
4518     getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(),
4519                            S);
4520   // Compute size of all parameters.
4521   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4522   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4523   SourceLocation Loc;
4524   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4525   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4526   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4527        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4528     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4529     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4530     if (sz.isZero())
4531       continue;
4532     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type");
4533     ParmOffset += sz;
4534   }
4535   // Size of the argument frame
4536   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4537   // Block pointer and offset.
4538   S += "@?0";
4539 
4540   // Argument types.
4541   ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4542   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E =
4543        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4544     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4545     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4546     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4547           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4548       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4549       // elements.
4550       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4551         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4552     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4553       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4554     if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig)
4555       getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None, PType,
4556                                       S, true /*Extended*/);
4557     else
4558       getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4559     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4560     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4561   }
4562 
4563   return S;
4564 }
4565 
4566 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl,
4567                                                 std::string& S) {
4568   // Encode result type.
4569   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S);
4570   CharUnits ParmOffset;
4571   // Compute size of all parameters.
4572   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4573        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4574     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4575     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4576     if (sz.isZero())
4577       continue;
4578 
4579     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4580         "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type");
4581     ParmOffset += sz;
4582   }
4583   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4584   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero();
4585 
4586   // Argument types.
4587   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4588        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4589     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4590     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4591     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4592           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4593       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4594       // elements.
4595       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4596         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4597     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4598       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4599     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4600     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4601     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4602   }
4603 
4604   return false;
4605 }
4606 
4607 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single
4608 /// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and
4609 /// block object types.
4610 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
4611                                                    QualType T, std::string& S,
4612                                                    bool Extended) const {
4613   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter.
4614   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S);
4615   // Encode parameter type.
4616   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0,
4617                              true     /*OutermostType*/,
4618                              false    /*EncodingProperty*/,
4619                              false    /*StructField*/,
4620                              Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/,
4621                              Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/);
4622 }
4623 
4624 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method
4625 /// declaration.
4626 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl,
4627                                               std::string& S,
4628                                               bool Extended) const {
4629   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4630   // Encode return type.
4631   getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4632                                     Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended);
4633   // Compute size of all parameters.
4634   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4635   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4636   SourceLocation Loc;
4637   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4638   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for
4639   // their size.
4640   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4641   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4642        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4643     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4644     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4645     if (sz.isZero())
4646       continue;
4647 
4648     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4649         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type");
4650     ParmOffset += sz;
4651   }
4652   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4653   S += "@0:";
4654   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize);
4655 
4656   // Argument types.
4657   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4658   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4659        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4660     const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4661     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4662     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4663           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4664       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4665       // elements.
4666       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4667         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4668     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4669       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4670     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4671                                       PType, S, Extended);
4672     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4673     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4674   }
4675 
4676   return false;
4677 }
4678 
4679 /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this
4680 /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an
4681 /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be
4682 /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties.
4683 /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple
4684 /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The
4685 /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are
4686 /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types
4687 /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode
4688 /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration:
4689 /// @code
4690 /// enum PropertyAttributes {
4691 /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only.
4692 /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned
4693 /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned
4694 /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic
4695 /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name
4696 /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name
4697 /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name
4698 /// kPropertyType = 'T'              // followed by old-style type encoding.
4699 /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property
4700 /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able
4701 /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic
4702 /// };
4703 /// @endcode
4704 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD,
4705                                                 const Decl *Container,
4706                                                 std::string& S) const {
4707   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s).
4708   bool Dynamic = false;
4709   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0;
4710 
4711   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction.
4712   if (Container) {
4713     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID =
4714         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) {
4715       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4716              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end();
4717            i != e; ++i) {
4718         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4719         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4720           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4721             Dynamic = true;
4722           } else {
4723             SynthesizePID = PID;
4724           }
4725         }
4726       }
4727     } else {
4728       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container);
4729       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4730              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end();
4731            i != e; ++i) {
4732         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4733         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4734           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4735             Dynamic = true;
4736           } else {
4737             SynthesizePID = PID;
4738           }
4739         }
4740       }
4741     }
4742   }
4743 
4744   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4745   S = "T";
4746 
4747   // Encode result type.
4748   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which
4749   // closely resembles encoding of ivars.
4750   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0,
4751                              true /* outermost type */,
4752                              true /* encoding for property */);
4753 
4754   if (PD->isReadOnly()) {
4755     S += ",R";
4756   } else {
4757     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) {
4758     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break;
4759     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break;
4760     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break;
4761     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak:   S += ",W"; break;
4762     }
4763   }
4764 
4765   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties
4766   // are "dynamic by default".
4767   if (Dynamic)
4768     S += ",D";
4769 
4770   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic)
4771     S += ",N";
4772 
4773   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) {
4774     S += ",G";
4775     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString();
4776   }
4777 
4778   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) {
4779     S += ",S";
4780     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString();
4781   }
4782 
4783   if (SynthesizePID) {
4784     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl();
4785     S += ",V";
4786     S += OID->getNameAsString();
4787   }
4788 
4789   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong
4790 }
4791 
4792 /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding -
4793 /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as
4794 /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use
4795 /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer!
4796 ///
4797 void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const {
4798   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4799     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4800       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4801         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy;
4802       else
4803         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4804           PointeeTy = IntTy;
4805     }
4806   }
4807 }
4808 
4809 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S,
4810                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const {
4811   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are
4812   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that
4813   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the
4814   // same type.
4815   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field,
4816                              true /* outermost type */);
4817 }
4818 
4819 static char getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C,
4820                                             BuiltinType::Kind kind) {
4821     switch (kind) {
4822     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v';
4823     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B';
4824     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4825     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C';
4826     case BuiltinType::Char16:
4827     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S';
4828     case BuiltinType::Char32:
4829     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I';
4830     case BuiltinType::ULong:
4831         return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q';
4832     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T';
4833     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q';
4834     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4835     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c';
4836     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's';
4837     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
4838     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
4839     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i';
4840     case BuiltinType::Long:
4841       return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'l' : 'q';
4842     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q';
4843     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't';
4844     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f';
4845     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd';
4846     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D';
4847     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:    return '*'; // like char*
4848 
4849     case BuiltinType::Half:
4850       // FIXME: potentially need @encodes for these!
4851       return ' ';
4852 
4853     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
4854     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
4855     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
4856       llvm_unreachable("@encoding ObjC primitive type");
4857 
4858     // OpenCL and placeholder types don't need @encodings.
4859     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d:
4860     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray:
4861     case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer:
4862     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d:
4863     case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray:
4864     case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d:
4865     case BuiltinType::Dependent:
4866 #define BUILTIN_TYPE(KIND, ID)
4867 #define PLACEHOLDER_TYPE(KIND, ID) \
4868     case BuiltinType::KIND:
4869 #include "clang/AST/BuiltinTypes.def"
4870       llvm_unreachable("invalid builtin type for @encode");
4871     }
4872 }
4873 
4874 static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) {
4875   EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl();
4876 
4877   // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size.
4878   if (!Enum->isFixed())
4879     return 'i';
4880 
4881   // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type.
4882   const BuiltinType *BT = Enum->getIntegerType()->castAs<BuiltinType>();
4883   return getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, BT->getKind());
4884 }
4885 
4886 static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S,
4887                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) {
4888   assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl");
4889   S += 'b';
4890   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits.
4891   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b,
4892   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the
4893   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure:
4894   //
4895   // struct
4896   // {
4897   //    int integer;
4898   //    int flags:2;
4899   // };
4900   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT
4901   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra
4902   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for
4903   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that
4904   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes...
4905   if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) {
4906     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent();
4907     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD);
4908     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex()));
4909     if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>())
4910       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET);
4911     else {
4912       const BuiltinType *BT = T->castAs<BuiltinType>();
4913       S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, BT->getKind());
4914     }
4915   }
4916   S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx));
4917 }
4918 
4919 // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string.
4920 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S,
4921                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures,
4922                                             bool ExpandStructures,
4923                                             const FieldDecl *FD,
4924                                             bool OutermostType,
4925                                             bool EncodingProperty,
4926                                             bool StructField,
4927                                             bool EncodeBlockParameters,
4928                                             bool EncodeClassNames) const {
4929   CanQualType CT = getCanonicalType(T);
4930   switch (CT->getTypeClass()) {
4931   case Type::Builtin:
4932   case Type::Enum:
4933     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4934       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4935     if (const BuiltinType *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CT))
4936       S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, BT->getKind());
4937     else
4938       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, cast<EnumType>(CT));
4939     return;
4940 
4941   case Type::Complex: {
4942     const ComplexType *CT = T->castAs<ComplexType>();
4943     S += 'j';
4944     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false,
4945                                false);
4946     return;
4947   }
4948 
4949   case Type::Atomic: {
4950     const AtomicType *AT = T->castAs<AtomicType>();
4951     S += 'A';
4952     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getValueType(), S, false, false, 0,
4953                                false, false);
4954     return;
4955   }
4956 
4957   // encoding for pointer or reference types.
4958   case Type::Pointer:
4959   case Type::LValueReference:
4960   case Type::RValueReference: {
4961     QualType PointeeTy;
4962     if (isa<PointerType>(CT)) {
4963       const PointerType *PT = T->castAs<PointerType>();
4964       if (PT->isObjCSelType()) {
4965         S += ':';
4966         return;
4967       }
4968       PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType();
4969     } else {
4970       PointeeTy = T->castAs<ReferenceType>()->getPointeeType();
4971     }
4972 
4973     bool isReadOnly = false;
4974     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the
4975     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of
4976     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef!
4977     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type!
4978     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) {
4979       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) {
4980         isReadOnly = true;
4981         S += 'r';
4982       }
4983     } else if (OutermostType) {
4984       QualType P = PointeeTy;
4985       while (P->getAs<PointerType>())
4986         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4987       if (P.isConstQualified()) {
4988         isReadOnly = true;
4989         S += 'r';
4990       }
4991     }
4992     if (isReadOnly) {
4993       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type
4994       // combinations need to be rearranged.
4995       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn"
4996       if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr"))
4997         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn");
4998     }
4999 
5000     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) {
5001       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a
5002       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'.
5003       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) {
5004         S += '*';
5005         return;
5006       }
5007     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) {
5008       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#".
5009       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) {
5010         S += '#';
5011         return;
5012       }
5013       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@".
5014       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) {
5015         S += '@';
5016         return;
5017       }
5018       // fall through...
5019     }
5020     S += '^';
5021     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy);
5022 
5023     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
5024                                NULL);
5025     return;
5026   }
5027 
5028   case Type::ConstantArray:
5029   case Type::IncompleteArray:
5030   case Type::VariableArray: {
5031     const ArrayType *AT = cast<ArrayType>(CT);
5032 
5033     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) {
5034       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element.
5035       S += '^';
5036 
5037       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
5038                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
5039     } else {
5040       S += '[';
5041 
5042       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
5043         if (getTypeSize(CAT->getElementType()) == 0)
5044           S += '0';
5045         else
5046           S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue());
5047       } else {
5048         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements.
5049         assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) &&
5050                "Unknown array type!");
5051         S += '0';
5052       }
5053 
5054       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
5055                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
5056       S += ']';
5057     }
5058     return;
5059   }
5060 
5061   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
5062   case Type::FunctionProto:
5063     S += '?';
5064     return;
5065 
5066   case Type::Record: {
5067     RecordDecl *RDecl = cast<RecordType>(CT)->getDecl();
5068     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{';
5069     // Anonymous structures print as '?'
5070     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) {
5071       S += II->getName();
5072       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec
5073           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) {
5074         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs();
5075         std::string TemplateArgsStr
5076           = TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(
5077                                             TemplateArgs.data(),
5078                                             TemplateArgs.size(),
5079                                             (*this).getPrintingPolicy());
5080 
5081         S += TemplateArgsStr;
5082       }
5083     } else {
5084       S += '?';
5085     }
5086     if (ExpandStructures) {
5087       S += '=';
5088       if (!RDecl->isUnion()) {
5089         getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD);
5090       } else {
5091         for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5092                                      FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5093              Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
5094           if (FD) {
5095             S += '"';
5096             S += Field->getNameAsString();
5097             S += '"';
5098           }
5099 
5100           // Special case bit-fields.
5101           if (Field->isBitField()) {
5102             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true,
5103                                        *Field);
5104           } else {
5105             QualType qt = Field->getType();
5106             getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5107             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true,
5108                                        FD, /*OutermostType*/false,
5109                                        /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5110                                        /*StructField*/true);
5111           }
5112         }
5113       }
5114     }
5115     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}';
5116     return;
5117   }
5118 
5119   case Type::BlockPointer: {
5120     const BlockPointerType *BT = T->castAs<BlockPointerType>();
5121     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?".
5122     if (EncodeBlockParameters) {
5123       const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->castAs<FunctionType>();
5124 
5125       S += '<';
5126       // Block return type
5127       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S,
5128                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures,
5129                                  FD,
5130                                  false /* OutermostType */,
5131                                  EncodingProperty,
5132                                  false /* StructField */,
5133                                  EncodeBlockParameters,
5134                                  EncodeClassNames);
5135       // Block self
5136       S += "@?";
5137       // Block parameters
5138       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) {
5139         for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(),
5140                E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) {
5141           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S,
5142                                      ExpandPointedToStructures,
5143                                      ExpandStructures,
5144                                      FD,
5145                                      false /* OutermostType */,
5146                                      EncodingProperty,
5147                                      false /* StructField */,
5148                                      EncodeBlockParameters,
5149                                      EncodeClassNames);
5150         }
5151       }
5152       S += '>';
5153     }
5154     return;
5155   }
5156 
5157   case Type::ObjCObject:
5158   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
5159     // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level.
5160     T = T->castAs<ObjCObjectType>()->getBaseType();
5161 
5162     // The assumption seems to be that this assert will succeed
5163     // because nested levels will have filtered out 'id' and 'Class'.
5164     const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->castAs<ObjCInterfaceType>();
5165     // @encode(class_name)
5166     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl();
5167     S += '{';
5168     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier();
5169     S += II->getName();
5170     S += '=';
5171     SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars;
5172     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars);
5173     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) {
5174       const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]);
5175       if (Field->isBitField())
5176         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field);
5177       else
5178         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD);
5179     }
5180     S += '}';
5181     return;
5182   }
5183 
5184   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
5185     const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->castAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5186     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) {
5187       S += '@';
5188       return;
5189     }
5190 
5191     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) {
5192       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'.
5193       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime
5194       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct.
5195       S += '#';
5196       return;
5197     }
5198 
5199     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5200       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S,
5201                                  ExpandPointedToStructures,
5202                                  ExpandStructures, FD);
5203       if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) {
5204         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list
5205         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding.
5206         S += '"';
5207         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5208              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5209           S += '<';
5210           S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5211           S += '>';
5212         }
5213         S += '"';
5214       }
5215       return;
5216     }
5217 
5218     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType();
5219     if (!EncodingProperty &&
5220         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
5221       // Another historical/compatibility reason.
5222       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as
5223       // {...};
5224       S += '^';
5225       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S,
5226                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
5227                                  NULL);
5228       return;
5229     }
5230 
5231     S += '@';
5232     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() &&
5233         (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) {
5234       S += '"';
5235       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName();
5236       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5237            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5238         S += '<';
5239         S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5240         S += '>';
5241       }
5242       S += '"';
5243     }
5244     return;
5245   }
5246 
5247   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers.
5248   // FIXME: we shoul do better than that.  'M' is available.
5249   case Type::MemberPointer:
5250     return;
5251 
5252   case Type::Vector:
5253   case Type::ExtVector:
5254     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is
5255     // insufficient.
5256     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc.
5257     return;
5258 
5259 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(KIND, BASE)
5260 #define TYPE(KIND, BASE)
5261 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5262   case Type::KIND:
5263 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5264   case Type::KIND:
5265 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \
5266   case Type::KIND:
5267 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
5268     llvm_unreachable("@encode for dependent type!");
5269   }
5270   llvm_unreachable("bad type kind!");
5271 }
5272 
5273 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl,
5274                                                  std::string &S,
5275                                                  const FieldDecl *FD,
5276                                                  bool includeVBases) const {
5277   assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl");
5278   assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions");
5279   if (!RDecl->getDefinition())
5280     return;
5281 
5282   CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl);
5283   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets;
5284   const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl);
5285 
5286   if (CXXRec) {
5287     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5288            BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(),
5289            BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5290       if (!BI->isVirtual()) {
5291         CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5292         if (base->isEmpty())
5293           continue;
5294         uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base));
5295         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5296                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5297       }
5298     }
5299   }
5300 
5301   unsigned i = 0;
5302   for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5303                                FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5304        Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) {
5305     uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i);
5306     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5307                               std::make_pair(offs, *Field));
5308   }
5309 
5310   if (CXXRec && includeVBases) {
5311     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5312            BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(),
5313            BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5314       CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5315       if (base->isEmpty())
5316         continue;
5317       uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base));
5318       if (FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end())
5319         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(),
5320                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5321     }
5322   }
5323 
5324   CharUnits size;
5325   if (CXXRec) {
5326     size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize();
5327   } else {
5328     size = layout.getSize();
5329   }
5330 
5331   uint64_t CurOffs = 0;
5332   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator
5333     CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin();
5334 
5335   if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() &&
5336       (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) {
5337     if (FD) {
5338       S += "\"_vptr$";
5339       std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString();
5340       if (recname.empty()) recname = "?";
5341       S += recname;
5342       S += '"';
5343     }
5344     S += "^^?";
5345     CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy);
5346   }
5347 
5348   if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) {
5349     // Mark the end of the structure.
5350     uint64_t offs = toBits(size);
5351     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5352                               std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0));
5353   }
5354 
5355   for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) {
5356     assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first);
5357 
5358     if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) {
5359       uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs;
5360       // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that
5361       // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case
5362       // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout.
5363       // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without
5364       // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the
5365       // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be
5366       // longer then though.
5367       CurOffs += padding;
5368     }
5369 
5370     NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second;
5371     if (dcl == 0)
5372       break; // reached end of structure.
5373 
5374     if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) {
5375       // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going
5376       // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which
5377       // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy,
5378       // making the encoding type bigger than it really is.
5379       getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false);
5380       assert(!base->isEmpty());
5381       CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize());
5382     } else {
5383       FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl);
5384       if (FD) {
5385         S += '"';
5386         S += field->getNameAsString();
5387         S += '"';
5388       }
5389 
5390       if (field->isBitField()) {
5391         EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field);
5392         CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
5393       } else {
5394         QualType qt = field->getType();
5395         getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5396         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD,
5397                                    /*OutermostType*/false,
5398                                    /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5399                                    /*StructField*/true);
5400         CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType());
5401       }
5402     }
5403   }
5404 }
5405 
5406 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
5407                                                  std::string& S) const {
5408   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In)
5409     S += 'n';
5410   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout)
5411     S += 'N';
5412   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out)
5413     S += 'o';
5414   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy)
5415     S += 'O';
5416   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref)
5417     S += 'R';
5418   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway)
5419     S += 'V';
5420 }
5421 
5422 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const {
5423   if (!ObjCIdDecl) {
5424     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0);
5425     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5426     TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5427     ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5428                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5429                                      SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5430                                      &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo);
5431   }
5432 
5433   return ObjCIdDecl;
5434 }
5435 
5436 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const {
5437   if (!ObjCSelDecl) {
5438     QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy);
5439     TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT);
5440     ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5441                                       getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5442                                       SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5443                                       &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo);
5444   }
5445   return ObjCSelDecl;
5446 }
5447 
5448 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const {
5449   if (!ObjCClassDecl) {
5450     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0);
5451     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5452     TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5453     ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5454                                         getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5455                                         SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5456                                         &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo);
5457   }
5458 
5459   return ObjCClassDecl;
5460 }
5461 
5462 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const {
5463   if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) {
5464     ObjCProtocolClassDecl
5465       = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5466                                   SourceLocation(),
5467                                   &Idents.get("Protocol"),
5468                                   /*PrevDecl=*/0,
5469                                   SourceLocation(), true);
5470   }
5471 
5472   return ObjCProtocolClassDecl;
5473 }
5474 
5475 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5476 // __builtin_va_list Construction Functions
5477 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5478 
5479 static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5480   // typedef char* __builtin_va_list;
5481   QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy);
5482   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5483     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType);
5484 
5485   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5486     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5487                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5488                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5489                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5490                           TInfo);
5491   return VaListTypeDecl;
5492 }
5493 
5494 static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5495   // typedef void* __builtin_va_list;
5496   QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5497   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5498     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType);
5499 
5500   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5501     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5502                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5503                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5504                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5505                           TInfo);
5506   return VaListTypeDecl;
5507 }
5508 
5509 static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5510   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5511   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5512 
5513   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5514                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5515                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5516   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5517 
5518   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5519   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5520   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5521 
5522   //   unsigned char gpr;
5523   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5524   FieldNames[0] = "gpr";
5525 
5526   //   unsigned char fpr;
5527   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5528   FieldNames[1] = "fpr";
5529 
5530   //   unsigned short reserved;
5531   FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy;
5532   FieldNames[2] = "reserved";
5533 
5534   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5535   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5536   FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area";
5537 
5538   //   void* reg_save_area;
5539   FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5540   FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area";
5541 
5542   // Create fields
5543   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5544     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl,
5545                                          SourceLocation(),
5546                                          SourceLocation(),
5547                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5548                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5549                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5550                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5551                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5552     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5553     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5554   }
5555   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5556   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5557   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5558 
5559   // } __va_list_tag;
5560   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5561     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5562                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5563                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5564                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5565                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5566   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5567     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5568 
5569   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5570   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5571   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5572     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5573                                     Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5574   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5575     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5576   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5577     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5578                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5579                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5580                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5581                           TInfo);
5582 
5583   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5584 }
5585 
5586 static TypedefDecl *
5587 CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5588   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5589   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5590   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5591                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5592                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5593   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5594 
5595   const size_t NumFields = 4;
5596   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5597   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5598 
5599   //   unsigned gp_offset;
5600   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5601   FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset";
5602 
5603   //   unsigned fp_offset;
5604   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5605   FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset";
5606 
5607   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5608   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5609   FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area";
5610 
5611   //   void* reg_save_area;
5612   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5613   FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area";
5614 
5615   // Create fields
5616   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5617     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5618                                          VaListTagDecl,
5619                                          SourceLocation(),
5620                                          SourceLocation(),
5621                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5622                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5623                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5624                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5625                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5626     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5627     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5628   }
5629   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5630   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5631   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5632 
5633   // } __va_list_tag;
5634   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5635     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5636                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5637                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5638                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5639                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5640   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5641     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5642 
5643   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5644   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5645   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5646     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5647                                       Size, ArrayType::Normal,0);
5648   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5649     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5650   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5651     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5652                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5653                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5654                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5655                           TInfo);
5656 
5657   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5658 }
5659 
5660 static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5661   // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4];
5662   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4);
5663   QualType IntArrayType
5664     = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy,
5665 				    Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5666   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5667     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5668                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5669                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5670                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5671                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType));
5672 
5673   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5674 }
5675 
5676 static TypedefDecl *
5677 CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5678   RecordDecl *VaListDecl;
5679   if (Context->getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
5680     // namespace std { struct __va_list {
5681     NamespaceDecl *NS;
5682     NS = NamespaceDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5683                                Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5684                                /*Inline*/false, SourceLocation(),
5685                                SourceLocation(), &Context->Idents.get("std"),
5686                                /*PrevDecl*/0);
5687 
5688     VaListDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5689                                        Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5690                                        SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5691                                        &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5692 
5693     VaListDecl->setDeclContext(NS);
5694 
5695   } else {
5696     // struct __va_list {
5697     VaListDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5698                                   Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5699                                   &Context->Idents.get("__va_list"));
5700   }
5701 
5702   VaListDecl->startDefinition();
5703 
5704   // void * __ap;
5705   FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5706                                        VaListDecl,
5707                                        SourceLocation(),
5708                                        SourceLocation(),
5709                                        &Context->Idents.get("__ap"),
5710                                        Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy),
5711                                        /*TInfo=*/0,
5712                                        /*BitWidth=*/0,
5713                                        /*Mutable=*/false,
5714                                        ICIS_NoInit);
5715   Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5716   VaListDecl->addDecl(Field);
5717 
5718   // };
5719   VaListDecl->completeDefinition();
5720 
5721   // typedef struct __va_list __builtin_va_list;
5722   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5723     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Context->getRecordType(VaListDecl));
5724 
5725   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5726     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5727                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5728                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5729                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5730                           TInfo);
5731 
5732   return VaListTypeDecl;
5733 }
5734 
5735 static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context,
5736                                      TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) {
5737   switch (Kind) {
5738   case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList:
5739     return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5740   case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList:
5741     return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5742   case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList:
5743     return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5744   case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5745     return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5746   case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList:
5747     return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5748   case TargetInfo::AAPCSABIBuiltinVaList:
5749     return CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5750   }
5751 
5752   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind");
5753 }
5754 
5755 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const {
5756   if (!BuiltinVaListDecl)
5757     BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind());
5758 
5759   return BuiltinVaListDecl;
5760 }
5761 
5762 QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const {
5763   // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list
5764   // declaration.
5765   if (VaListTagTy.isNull())
5766     (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl();
5767 
5768   return VaListTagTy;
5769 }
5770 
5771 void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) {
5772   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() &&
5773          "'NSConstantString' type already set!");
5774 
5775   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
5776 }
5777 
5778 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty
5779 /// lookup.
5780 TemplateName
5781 ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,
5782                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const {
5783   unsigned size = End - Begin;
5784   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!");
5785 
5786   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) +
5787                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*));
5788   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size);
5789 
5790   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage();
5791   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) {
5792     NamedDecl *D = *I;
5793     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) ||
5794            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) &&
5795             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl())));
5796     *Storage++ = D;
5797   }
5798 
5799   return TemplateName(OT);
5800 }
5801 
5802 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified
5803 /// template name such as \c std::vector.
5804 TemplateName
5805 ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5806                                      bool TemplateKeyword,
5807                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const {
5808   assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name");
5809 
5810   // FIXME: Canonicalization?
5811   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5812   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5813 
5814   void *InsertPos = 0;
5815   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN =
5816     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5817   if (!QTN) {
5818     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<QualifiedTemplateName>())
5819         QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5820     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5821   }
5822 
5823   return TemplateName(QTN);
5824 }
5825 
5826 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5827 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply.
5828 TemplateName
5829 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5830                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const {
5831   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5832          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5833 
5834   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5835   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name);
5836 
5837   void *InsertPos = 0;
5838   DependentTemplateName *QTN =
5839     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5840 
5841   if (QTN)
5842     return TemplateName(QTN);
5843 
5844   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5845   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5846     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5847         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name);
5848   } else {
5849     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name);
5850     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5851         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon);
5852     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN =
5853       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5854     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken");
5855     (void)CheckQTN;
5856   }
5857 
5858   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5859   return TemplateName(QTN);
5860 }
5861 
5862 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5863 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+.
5864 TemplateName
5865 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5866                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const {
5867   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5868          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5869 
5870   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5871   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator);
5872 
5873   void *InsertPos = 0;
5874   DependentTemplateName *QTN
5875     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5876 
5877   if (QTN)
5878     return TemplateName(QTN);
5879 
5880   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5881   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5882     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5883         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator);
5884   } else {
5885     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator);
5886     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5887         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon);
5888 
5889     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN
5890       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5891     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken");
5892     (void)CheckQTN;
5893   }
5894 
5895   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5896   return TemplateName(QTN);
5897 }
5898 
5899 TemplateName
5900 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param,
5901                                          TemplateName replacement) const {
5902   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5903   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement);
5904 
5905   void *insertPos = 0;
5906   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
5907     = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
5908 
5909   if (!subst) {
5910     subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement);
5911     SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos);
5912   }
5913 
5914   return TemplateName(subst);
5915 }
5916 
5917 TemplateName
5918 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param,
5919                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const {
5920   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this);
5921   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5922   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack);
5923 
5924   void *InsertPos = 0;
5925   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst
5926     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5927 
5928   if (!Subst) {
5929     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param,
5930                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(),
5931                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin());
5932     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos);
5933   }
5934 
5935   return TemplateName(Subst);
5936 }
5937 
5938 /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by
5939 /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type
5940 /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType.
5941 CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const {
5942   switch (Type) {
5943   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType();
5944   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy;
5945   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy;
5946   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy;
5947   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy;
5948   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy;
5949   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy;
5950   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy;
5951   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy;
5952   }
5953 
5954   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value");
5955 }
5956 
5957 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5958 //                        Type Predicates.
5959 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5960 
5961 /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's
5962 /// garbage collection attribute.
5963 ///
5964 Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const {
5965   if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC)
5966     return Qualifiers::GCNone;
5967 
5968   assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1);
5969   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr();
5970 
5971   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers
5972   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared
5973   // as __strong.
5974   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) {
5975     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
5976       return Qualifiers::Strong;
5977     else if (Ty->isPointerType())
5978       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType());
5979   } else {
5980     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a
5981     // pointer.
5982 #ifndef NDEBUG
5983     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal();
5984     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT))
5985       CT = AT->getElementType();
5986     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType());
5987 #endif
5988   }
5989   return GCAttrs;
5990 }
5991 
5992 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5993 //                        Type Compatibility Testing
5994 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5995 
5996 /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are
5997 /// compatible.
5998 static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS,
5999                                  const VectorType *RHS) {
6000   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified());
6001   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() &&
6002          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements();
6003 }
6004 
6005 bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,
6006                                           QualType SecondVec) {
6007   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type");
6008   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type");
6009 
6010   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec))
6011     return true;
6012 
6013   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the
6014   // equivalent GCC vector types.
6015   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>();
6016   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>();
6017   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() &&
6018       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) &&
6019       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
6020       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool &&
6021       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
6022       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool)
6023     return true;
6024 
6025   return false;
6026 }
6027 
6028 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6029 // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's.
6030 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6031 
6032 /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the
6033 /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'.
6034 bool
6035 ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto,
6036                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const {
6037   if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto))
6038     return true;
6039   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(),
6040        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI)
6041     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI))
6042       return true;
6043   return false;
6044 }
6045 
6046 /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<pr,...> with id<pr1,...>
6047 /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false
6048 /// otherwise.
6049 bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
6050   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
6051     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false);
6052   return false;
6053 }
6054 
6055 /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<pr,...> and
6056 /// Class<pr1, ...>.
6057 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,
6058                                                       QualType rhs) {
6059   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6060   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6061   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible");
6062 
6063   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6064        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6065     bool match = false;
6066     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6067     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6068          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6069       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6070       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) {
6071         match = true;
6072         break;
6073       }
6074     }
6075     if (!match)
6076       return false;
6077   }
6078   return true;
6079 }
6080 
6081 /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an
6082 /// ObjCQualifiedIDType.
6083 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6084                                                    bool compare) {
6085   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases.
6086   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
6087       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType())
6088     return true;
6089   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
6090            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType())
6091     return true;
6092 
6093   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
6094     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6095 
6096     if (!rhsOPT) return false;
6097 
6098     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) {
6099       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*",
6100       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
6101       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6102         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6103              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6104           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6105           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6106           // through its super class and categories.
6107           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true))
6108             return false;
6109         }
6110       }
6111       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'.
6112       return true;
6113     }
6114     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
6115     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6116          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6117       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6118       bool match = false;
6119 
6120       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6121       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6122       // through its super class and categories.
6123       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6124            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6125         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6126         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6127             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6128           match = true;
6129           break;
6130         }
6131       }
6132       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*",
6133       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
6134       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6135         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
6136              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6137           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
6138           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6139           // through its super class and categories.
6140           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) {
6141             match = true;
6142             break;
6143           }
6144         }
6145       }
6146       if (!match)
6147         return false;
6148     }
6149 
6150     return true;
6151   }
6152 
6153   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType();
6154   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>");
6155 
6156   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT =
6157         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) {
6158     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
6159     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(),
6160          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
6161       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
6162       bool match = false;
6163 
6164       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs,
6165       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
6166       // through its super class and categories.
6167       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct
6168       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
6169       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
6170            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6171         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6172         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6173             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6174           match = true;
6175           break;
6176         }
6177       }
6178       if (!match)
6179         return false;
6180     }
6181 
6182     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols
6183     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
6184     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
6185       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6186       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols);
6187       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has
6188       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s)
6189       // assume that it is mismatch.
6190       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty())
6191         return false;
6192       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6193            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6194            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6195         bool match = false;
6196         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I);
6197         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
6198              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
6199           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
6200           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
6201               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
6202             match = true;
6203             break;
6204           }
6205         }
6206         if (!match)
6207           return false;
6208       }
6209     }
6210     return true;
6211   }
6212   return false;
6213 }
6214 
6215 /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are
6216 /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any
6217 /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS.
6218 ///
6219 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6220                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) {
6221   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
6222   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
6223 
6224   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true.
6225   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() ||
6226       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass())
6227     return true;
6228 
6229   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId())
6230     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6231                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
6232                                              false);
6233 
6234   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass())
6235     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6236                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0));
6237 
6238   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path.
6239   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface())
6240     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS);
6241 
6242   return false;
6243 }
6244 
6245 /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written
6246 /// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return
6247 /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where
6248 /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is
6249 /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK.
6250 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6251                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6252                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6253                                          bool BlockReturnType) {
6254   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType())
6255     return true;
6256 
6257   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) {
6258     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType();
6259   }
6260 
6261   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
6262     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6263                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
6264                                              false);
6265 
6266   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6267   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6268   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types.
6269     if (LHS != RHS) {
6270       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl()))
6271         return BlockReturnType;
6272       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl()))
6273         return !BlockReturnType;
6274     }
6275     else
6276       return true;
6277   }
6278   return false;
6279 }
6280 
6281 /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set
6282 /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects.
6283 /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of
6284 /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects.
6285 static
6286 void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context,
6287                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6288                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6289       SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) {
6290 
6291   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
6292   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
6293   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base");
6294   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base");
6295 
6296   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet;
6297   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols();
6298   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0)
6299     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end());
6300   else {
6301     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6302     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(),
6303                                       LHSInheritedProtocols);
6304     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6305                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end());
6306   }
6307 
6308   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols();
6309   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) {
6310     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols =
6311       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin());
6312     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i)
6313       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i]))
6314         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]);
6315   } else {
6316     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols;
6317     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(),
6318                                       RHSInheritedProtocols);
6319     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6320          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6321          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)
6322       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I)))
6323         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I));
6324   }
6325 }
6326 
6327 /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if
6328 /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the
6329 /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a
6330 /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare.
6331 QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible(
6332                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr,
6333                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) {
6334   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType();
6335   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType();
6336   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface();
6337   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface();
6338   if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl)))
6339     return QualType();
6340 
6341   do {
6342     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl));
6343     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) {
6344       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols;
6345       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols);
6346 
6347       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0);
6348       if (!Protocols.empty())
6349         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size());
6350       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result);
6351       return Result;
6352     }
6353   } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass()));
6354 
6355   return QualType();
6356 }
6357 
6358 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS,
6359                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) {
6360   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type");
6361   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type");
6362 
6363   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of
6364   // the LHS.
6365   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()))
6366     return false;
6367 
6368   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not
6369   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good.
6370   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0)
6371     return true;
6372 
6373   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't,
6374   // more detailed analysis is required.
6375   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) {
6376     // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and*
6377     // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS.
6378     // false otherwise.
6379     bool IsSuperClass =
6380       LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface());
6381     if (IsSuperClass) {
6382       // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types
6383       // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols
6384       // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok.
6385       // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>.
6386       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols;
6387       CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols);
6388       // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match.
6389       if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty())
6390         return false;
6391 
6392       for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6393            LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6394            LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6395         bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false;
6396         ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI);
6397 
6398         for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6399              SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6400              E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6401           ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I);
6402           if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) {
6403             SuperImplementsProtocol = true;
6404             break;
6405           }
6406         }
6407         if (!SuperImplementsProtocol)
6408           return false;
6409       }
6410       return true;
6411     }
6412     return false;
6413   }
6414 
6415   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6416                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6417        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6418     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false;
6419 
6420     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types
6421     // are incompatible.
6422     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(),
6423                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end();
6424          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) {
6425       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) {
6426         RHSImplementsProtocol = true;
6427         break;
6428       }
6429     }
6430     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name.
6431     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol)
6432       return false;
6433   }
6434   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS.
6435   return true;
6436 }
6437 
6438 bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6439   // get the "pointed to" types
6440   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6441   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6442 
6443   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT)
6444     return false;
6445 
6446   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) ||
6447          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT);
6448 }
6449 
6450 bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) {
6451   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(
6452                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6453                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>());
6454 }
6455 
6456 /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible,
6457 /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type.
6458 /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the
6459 /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules.
6460 bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6461                                     bool CompareUnqualified) {
6462   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
6463     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS);
6464 
6465   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull();
6466 }
6467 
6468 bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6469   return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS);
6470 }
6471 
6472 bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6473   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull();
6474 }
6475 
6476 /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member
6477 /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return
6478 /// QualType()
6479 QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType,
6480                                                bool OfBlockPointer,
6481                                                bool Unqualified) {
6482   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) {
6483     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl();
6484     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) {
6485       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(),
6486            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) {
6487         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType();
6488         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6489         if (!MT.isNull())
6490           return MT;
6491       }
6492     }
6493   }
6494 
6495   return QualType();
6496 }
6497 
6498 /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function
6499 /// argument types
6500 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6501                                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6502                                                 bool Unqualified) {
6503   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function
6504   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other
6505   // type is compatible with a union member
6506   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer,
6507                                               Unqualified);
6508   if (!lmerge.isNull())
6509     return lmerge;
6510 
6511   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer,
6512                                               Unqualified);
6513   if (!rmerge.isNull())
6514     return rmerge;
6515 
6516   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6517 }
6518 
6519 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6520                                         bool OfBlockPointer,
6521                                         bool Unqualified) {
6522   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6523   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6524   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase);
6525   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase);
6526   bool allLTypes = true;
6527   bool allRTypes = true;
6528 
6529   // Check return type
6530   QualType retType;
6531   if (OfBlockPointer) {
6532     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType();
6533     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType();
6534     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified;
6535     if (!UnqualifiedResult)
6536       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers());
6537     retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true);
6538   }
6539   else
6540     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false,
6541                          Unqualified);
6542   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType();
6543 
6544   if (Unqualified)
6545     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType();
6546 
6547   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType());
6548   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType());
6549   if (Unqualified) {
6550     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6551     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6552   }
6553 
6554   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType)
6555     allLTypes = false;
6556   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType)
6557     allRTypes = false;
6558 
6559   // FIXME: double check this
6560   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6561   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6562   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()?
6563   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo();
6564   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo();
6565 
6566   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions
6567   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC()))
6568     return QualType();
6569 
6570   // Regparm is part of the calling convention.
6571   if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm())
6572     return QualType();
6573   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm())
6574     return QualType();
6575 
6576   if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult())
6577     return QualType();
6578 
6579   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'.
6580   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn();
6581 
6582   if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn)
6583     allLTypes = false;
6584   if (rbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn)
6585     allRTypes = false;
6586 
6587   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn);
6588 
6589   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes
6590     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() &&
6591            "C++ shouldn't be here");
6592     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs();
6593     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs();
6594 
6595     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments
6596     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs)
6597       return QualType();
6598 
6599     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible
6600     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic())
6601       return QualType();
6602 
6603     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals())
6604       return QualType();
6605 
6606     if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount &&
6607         !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto))
6608       return QualType();
6609 
6610     // Check argument compatibility
6611     SmallVector<QualType, 10> types;
6612     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) {
6613       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6614       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6615       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype,
6616                                                     OfBlockPointer,
6617                                                     Unqualified);
6618       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType();
6619 
6620       if (Unqualified)
6621         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6622 
6623       types.push_back(argtype);
6624       if (Unqualified) {
6625         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6626         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6627       }
6628 
6629       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype))
6630         allLTypes = false;
6631       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype))
6632         allRTypes = false;
6633     }
6634 
6635     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6636     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6637 
6638     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo();
6639     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6640     return getFunctionType(retType, types.begin(), types.size(), EPI);
6641   }
6642 
6643   if (lproto) allRTypes = false;
6644   if (rproto) allLTypes = false;
6645 
6646   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto;
6647   if (proto) {
6648     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here");
6649     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType();
6650     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that
6651     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15).
6652     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer
6653     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different
6654     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible.
6655     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs();
6656     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) {
6657       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i);
6658 
6659       // Look at the converted type of enum types, since that is the type used
6660       // to pass enum values.
6661       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6662         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6663         if (argTy.isNull())
6664           return QualType();
6665       }
6666 
6667       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() ||
6668           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy)
6669         return QualType();
6670     }
6671 
6672     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6673     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6674 
6675     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo();
6676     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6677     return getFunctionType(retType, proto->arg_type_begin(),
6678                            proto->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6679   }
6680 
6681   if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6682   if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6683   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo);
6684 }
6685 
6686 QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6687                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6688                                 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) {
6689   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the
6690   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression
6691   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the
6692   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and
6693   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses).
6694   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?");
6695   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?");
6696 
6697   if (Unqualified) {
6698     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6699     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6700   }
6701 
6702   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6703            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6704 
6705   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6706   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6707     return LHS;
6708 
6709   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly.
6710   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6711   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6712   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6713     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type
6714     // mismatch.
6715     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6716         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() ||
6717         LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime())
6718       return QualType();
6719 
6720     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6721     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6722     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6723     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6724     // qualified __strong.
6725     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6726     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6727     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6728 
6729     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6730       return QualType();
6731 
6732     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6733       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong));
6734     }
6735     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6736       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS);
6737     }
6738     return QualType();
6739   }
6740 
6741   // Okay, qualifiers are equal.
6742 
6743   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass();
6744   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass();
6745 
6746   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these
6747   // comparisons, just force one to the other.
6748   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6749   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6750 
6751   // Same as above for arrays
6752   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6753     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6754   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6755     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6756 
6757   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects.
6758   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6759   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6760 
6761   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector.
6762   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector;
6763   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector;
6764 
6765   // If the canonical type classes don't match.
6766   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) {
6767     // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char,
6768     // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type.
6769     // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion
6770     // type.
6771     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6772       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6773       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, RHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6774         return RHS;
6775     }
6776     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6777       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6778       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, LHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6779         return LHS;
6780     }
6781     // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type.
6782     if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) {
6783        if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType())
6784          return LHS;
6785       if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType())
6786         return RHS;
6787     }
6788 
6789     return QualType();
6790   }
6791 
6792   // The canonical type classes match.
6793   switch (LHSClass) {
6794 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
6795 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
6796 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6797 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6798 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6799 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
6800     llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here");
6801 
6802   case Type::LValueReference:
6803   case Type::RValueReference:
6804   case Type::MemberPointer:
6805     llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes");
6806 
6807   case Type::ObjCInterface:
6808   case Type::IncompleteArray:
6809   case Type::VariableArray:
6810   case Type::FunctionProto:
6811   case Type::ExtVector:
6812     llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above");
6813 
6814   case Type::Pointer:
6815   {
6816     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6817     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6818     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6819     if (Unqualified) {
6820       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6821       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6822     }
6823     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,
6824                                      Unqualified);
6825     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6826     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6827       return LHS;
6828     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6829       return RHS;
6830     return getPointerType(ResultType);
6831   }
6832   case Type::BlockPointer:
6833   {
6834     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6835     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6836     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6837     if (Unqualified) {
6838       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6839       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6840     }
6841     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer,
6842                                      Unqualified);
6843     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6844     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6845       return LHS;
6846     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6847       return RHS;
6848     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType);
6849   }
6850   case Type::Atomic:
6851   {
6852     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6853     QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6854     QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6855     if (Unqualified) {
6856       LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6857       RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6858     }
6859     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false,
6860                                      Unqualified);
6861     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6862     if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6863       return LHS;
6864     if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6865       return RHS;
6866     return getAtomicType(ResultType);
6867   }
6868   case Type::ConstantArray:
6869   {
6870     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS);
6871     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS);
6872     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize())
6873       return QualType();
6874 
6875     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType();
6876     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType();
6877     if (Unqualified) {
6878       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6879       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6880     }
6881 
6882     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified);
6883     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6884     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6885       return LHS;
6886     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6887       return RHS;
6888     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(),
6889                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6890     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(),
6891                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6892     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS);
6893     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS);
6894     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6895       return LHS;
6896     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6897       return RHS;
6898     if (LVAT) {
6899       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6900       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type
6901       // has to be different.
6902       return LHS;
6903     }
6904     if (RVAT) {
6905       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6906       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type
6907       // has to be different.
6908       return RHS;
6909     }
6910     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS;
6911     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS;
6912     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType,
6913                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6914   }
6915   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
6916     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6917   case Type::Record:
6918   case Type::Enum:
6919     return QualType();
6920   case Type::Builtin:
6921     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above.
6922     return QualType();
6923   case Type::Complex:
6924     // Distinct complex types are incompatible.
6925     return QualType();
6926   case Type::Vector:
6927     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector!
6928     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(),
6929                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>()))
6930       return LHS;
6931     return QualType();
6932   case Type::ObjCObject: {
6933     // Check if the types are assignment compatible.
6934     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether
6935     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal.
6936     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6937     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6938     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
6939       return LHS;
6940 
6941     return QualType();
6942   }
6943   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
6944     if (OfBlockPointer) {
6945       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6946                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6947                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6948                                           BlockReturnType))
6949         return LHS;
6950       return QualType();
6951     }
6952     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6953                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()))
6954       return LHS;
6955 
6956     return QualType();
6957   }
6958   }
6959 
6960   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!");
6961 }
6962 
6963 bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(
6964                    const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType,
6965                    const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) {
6966   if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() !=
6967       ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs())
6968     return false;
6969   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI =
6970     FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6971   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI =
6972     ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6973   if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments)
6974     for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs();
6975          ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx)  {
6976       if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] !=
6977           ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx])
6978         return false;
6979     }
6980   return true;
6981 }
6982 
6983 /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and
6984 /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function
6985 /// return types.
6986 QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6987   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6988   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6989   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6990   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6991     return LHS;
6992   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) {
6993     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType())
6994       return QualType();
6995     QualType OldReturnType =
6996       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6997     QualType NewReturnType =
6998       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6999     QualType ResReturnType =
7000       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType);
7001     if (ResReturnType.isNull())
7002       return QualType();
7003     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) {
7004       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo();
7005       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type.
7006       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>();
7007       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) {
7008         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
7009         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS);
7010         QualType ResultType
7011           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->arg_type_begin(),
7012                             FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
7013         return ResultType;
7014       }
7015     }
7016     return QualType();
7017   }
7018 
7019   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged.
7020   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
7021   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
7022   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
7023     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch.
7024     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
7025         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace())
7026       return QualType();
7027 
7028     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
7029     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
7030     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
7031     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
7032     // qualified __strong.
7033     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
7034     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
7035     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
7036 
7037     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
7038       return QualType();
7039 
7040     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong)
7041       return LHS;
7042     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong)
7043       return RHS;
7044     return QualType();
7045   }
7046 
7047   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
7048     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7049     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
7050     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT);
7051     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT)
7052       return LHS;
7053     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT)
7054       return RHS;
7055   }
7056   return QualType();
7057 }
7058 
7059 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7060 //                         Integer Predicates
7061 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7062 
7063 unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const {
7064   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T))
7065     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
7066   if (T->isBooleanType())
7067     return 1;
7068   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method
7069   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T);
7070 }
7071 
7072 QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) const {
7073   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type");
7074 
7075   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int>
7076   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>())
7077     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()),
7078                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind());
7079 
7080   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type.
7081   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>())
7082     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
7083 
7084   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
7085   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type");
7086   switch (BTy->getKind()) {
7087   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
7088   case BuiltinType::SChar:
7089     return UnsignedCharTy;
7090   case BuiltinType::Short:
7091     return UnsignedShortTy;
7092   case BuiltinType::Int:
7093     return UnsignedIntTy;
7094   case BuiltinType::Long:
7095     return UnsignedLongTy;
7096   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
7097     return UnsignedLongLongTy;
7098   case BuiltinType::Int128:
7099     return UnsignedInt128Ty;
7100   default:
7101     llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type");
7102   }
7103 }
7104 
7105 ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { }
7106 
7107 
7108 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7109 //                          Builtin Type Computation
7110 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
7111 
7112 /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the
7113 /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If
7114 /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic
7115 /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of
7116 /// a vector of "i*".
7117 ///
7118 /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required
7119 /// to be an Integer Constant Expression.
7120 static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context,
7121                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7122                                   bool &RequiresICE,
7123                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) {
7124   // Modifiers.
7125   int HowLong = 0;
7126   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false;
7127   RequiresICE = false;
7128 
7129   // Read the prefixed modifiers first.
7130   bool Done = false;
7131   while (!Done) {
7132     switch (*Str++) {
7133     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7134     case 'I':
7135       RequiresICE = true;
7136       break;
7137     case 'S':
7138       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
7139       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
7140       Signed = true;
7141       break;
7142     case 'U':
7143       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
7144       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
7145       Unsigned = true;
7146       break;
7147     case 'L':
7148       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier");
7149       ++HowLong;
7150       break;
7151     }
7152   }
7153 
7154   QualType Type;
7155 
7156   // Read the base type.
7157   switch (*Str++) {
7158   default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!");
7159   case 'v':
7160     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7161            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!");
7162     Type = Context.VoidTy;
7163     break;
7164   case 'f':
7165     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7166            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!");
7167     Type = Context.FloatTy;
7168     break;
7169   case 'd':
7170     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
7171            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!");
7172     if (HowLong)
7173       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy;
7174     else
7175       Type = Context.DoubleTy;
7176     break;
7177   case 's':
7178     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!");
7179     if (Unsigned)
7180       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy;
7181     else
7182       Type = Context.ShortTy;
7183     break;
7184   case 'i':
7185     if (HowLong == 3)
7186       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty;
7187     else if (HowLong == 2)
7188       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy;
7189     else if (HowLong == 1)
7190       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy;
7191     else
7192       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy;
7193     break;
7194   case 'c':
7195     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!");
7196     if (Signed)
7197       Type = Context.SignedCharTy;
7198     else if (Unsigned)
7199       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
7200     else
7201       Type = Context.CharTy;
7202     break;
7203   case 'b': // boolean
7204     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!");
7205     Type = Context.BoolTy;
7206     break;
7207   case 'z':  // size_t.
7208     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!");
7209     Type = Context.getSizeType();
7210     break;
7211   case 'F':
7212     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType();
7213     break;
7214   case 'G':
7215     Type = Context.getObjCIdType();
7216     break;
7217   case 'H':
7218     Type = Context.getObjCSelType();
7219     break;
7220   case 'M':
7221     Type = Context.getObjCSuperType();
7222     break;
7223   case 'a':
7224     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
7225     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
7226     break;
7227   case 'A':
7228     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly
7229     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two
7230     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones
7231     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is
7232     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list
7233     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86,
7234     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want
7235     // it to be a __va_list_tag*.
7236     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
7237     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
7238     if (Type->isArrayType())
7239       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type);
7240     else
7241       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7242     break;
7243   case 'V': {
7244     char *End;
7245     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7246     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7247     Str = End;
7248 
7249     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,
7250                                              RequiresICE, false);
7251     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE");
7252 
7253     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet.
7254     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements,
7255                                  VectorType::GenericVector);
7256     break;
7257   }
7258   case 'E': {
7259     char *End;
7260 
7261     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7262     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7263 
7264     Str = End;
7265 
7266     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7267                                              false);
7268     Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements);
7269     break;
7270   }
7271   case 'X': {
7272     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7273                                              false);
7274     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE");
7275     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType);
7276     break;
7277   }
7278   case 'Y' : {
7279     Type = Context.getPointerDiffType();
7280     break;
7281   }
7282   case 'P':
7283     Type = Context.getFILEType();
7284     if (Type.isNull()) {
7285       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio;
7286       return QualType();
7287     }
7288     break;
7289   case 'J':
7290     if (Signed)
7291       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType();
7292     else
7293       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType();
7294 
7295     if (Type.isNull()) {
7296       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp;
7297       return QualType();
7298     }
7299     break;
7300   case 'K':
7301     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!");
7302     Type = Context.getucontext_tType();
7303 
7304     if (Type.isNull()) {
7305       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext;
7306       return QualType();
7307     }
7308     break;
7309   case 'p':
7310     Type = Context.getProcessIDType();
7311     break;
7312   }
7313 
7314   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it.
7315   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers;
7316   while (!Done) {
7317     switch (char c = *Str++) {
7318     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7319     case '*':
7320     case '&': {
7321       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types
7322       // qualified with an address space.
7323       char *End;
7324       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7325       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) {
7326         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace);
7327         Str = End;
7328       }
7329       if (c == '*')
7330         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type);
7331       else
7332         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7333       break;
7334     }
7335     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg.
7336     case 'C':
7337       Type = Type.withConst();
7338       break;
7339     case 'D':
7340       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type);
7341       break;
7342     case 'R':
7343       Type = Type.withRestrict();
7344       break;
7345     }
7346   }
7347 
7348   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) &&
7349          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");
7350 
7351   return Type;
7352 }
7353 
7354 /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin.
7355 QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,
7356                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7357                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const {
7358   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id);
7359 
7360   SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
7361 
7362   bool RequiresICE = false;
7363   Error = GE_None;
7364   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error,
7365                                        RequiresICE, true);
7366   if (Error != GE_None)
7367     return QualType();
7368 
7369   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE");
7370 
7371   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') {
7372     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true);
7373     if (Error != GE_None)
7374       return QualType();
7375 
7376     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the
7377     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return.
7378     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs)
7379       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size();
7380 
7381     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type.
7382     if (Ty->isArrayType())
7383       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty);
7384 
7385     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty);
7386   }
7387 
7388   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) &&
7389          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!");
7390 
7391   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI;
7392   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true);
7393 
7394   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.');
7395 
7396   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++.
7397   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic)
7398     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI);
7399 
7400   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI;
7401   EPI.ExtInfo = EI;
7402   EPI.Variadic = Variadic;
7403 
7404   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes.data(), ArgTypes.size(), EPI);
7405 }
7406 
7407 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) {
7408   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7409 
7410   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage();
7411   switch (L) {
7412   case NoLinkage:
7413   case InternalLinkage:
7414   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7415     return GVA_Internal;
7416 
7417   case ExternalLinkage:
7418     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) {
7419     case TSK_Undeclared:
7420     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7421       External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7422       break;
7423 
7424     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7425       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7426 
7427     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7428     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7429       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7430       break;
7431     }
7432   }
7433 
7434   if (!FD->isInlined())
7435     return External;
7436 
7437   if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) {
7438     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be
7439     // externally visible.
7440     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible())
7441       return External;
7442 
7443     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible.
7444     return GVA_C99Inline;
7445   }
7446 
7447   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9:
7448   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of
7449   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly
7450   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for
7451   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be
7452   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ]
7453   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()
7454                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration)
7455     return GVA_C99Inline;
7456 
7457   return GVA_CXXInline;
7458 }
7459 
7460 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) {
7461   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template
7462   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a
7463   // template.
7464   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared;
7465   if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
7466     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind();
7467 
7468   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage();
7469   assert (!(L == ExternalLinkage && getLangOpts().CPlusPlus &&
7470             VD->getType()->getLinkage() == UniqueExternalLinkage));
7471 
7472   switch (L) {
7473   case NoLinkage:
7474   case InternalLinkage:
7475   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7476     return GVA_Internal;
7477 
7478   case ExternalLinkage:
7479     switch (TSK) {
7480     case TSK_Undeclared:
7481     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7482       return GVA_StrongExternal;
7483 
7484     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7485       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated");
7486       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation.
7487 
7488     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7489       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7490 
7491     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7492       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7493     }
7494   }
7495 
7496   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!");
7497 }
7498 
7499 bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) {
7500   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
7501     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl())
7502       return false;
7503   } else if (!isa<FunctionDecl>(D))
7504     return false;
7505 
7506   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves.
7507   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>())
7508     return false;
7509 
7510   // Aliases and used decls are required.
7511   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>())
7512     return true;
7513 
7514   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7515     // Forward declarations aren't required.
7516     if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody())
7517       return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition();
7518 
7519     // Constructors and destructors are required.
7520     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>())
7521       return true;
7522 
7523     // The key function for a class is required.
7524     if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) {
7525       const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent();
7526       if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) {
7527         const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getKeyFunction(RD);
7528         if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl())
7529           return true;
7530       }
7531     }
7532 
7533     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD);
7534 
7535     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can
7536     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++.
7537     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++.
7538     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline ||
7539         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7540       return false;
7541     return true;
7542   }
7543 
7544   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D);
7545   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var");
7546 
7547   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly)
7548     return false;
7549 
7550   // Variables that can be needed in other TUs are required.
7551   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD);
7552   if (L != GVA_Internal && L != GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7553     return true;
7554 
7555   // Variables that have destruction with side-effects are required.
7556   if (VD->getType().isDestructedType())
7557     return true;
7558 
7559   // Variables that have initialization with side-effects are required.
7560   if (VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this))
7561     return true;
7562 
7563   return false;
7564 }
7565 
7566 CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic) {
7567   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7568   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(isVariadic);
7569 }
7570 
7571 CallingConv ASTContext::getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const {
7572   if (CC == CC_C && !LangOpts.MRTD && getTargetInfo().getCXXABI() != CXXABI_Microsoft)
7573     return CC_Default;
7574   return CC;
7575 }
7576 
7577 bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const {
7578   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7579   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD);
7580 }
7581 
7582 MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() {
7583   switch (Target->getCXXABI()) {
7584   case CXXABI_ARM:
7585   case CXXABI_Itanium:
7586     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7587   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
7588     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7589   }
7590   llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI");
7591 }
7592 
7593 CXXABI::~CXXABI() {}
7594 
7595 size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const {
7596   return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize()
7597     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts)
7598     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions)
7599     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls)
7600     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits)
7601     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs)
7602     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember)
7603     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl)
7604     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl)
7605     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl)
7606     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods)
7607     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types)
7608     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes)
7609     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern);
7610 }
7611 
7612 void ASTContext::addUnnamedTag(const TagDecl *Tag) {
7613   // FIXME: This mangling should be applied to function local classes too
7614   if (!Tag->getName().empty() || Tag->getTypedefNameForAnonDecl() ||
7615       !isa<CXXRecordDecl>(Tag->getParent()) || Tag->getLinkage() != ExternalLinkage)
7616     return;
7617 
7618   std::pair<llvm::DenseMap<const DeclContext *, unsigned>::iterator, bool> P =
7619     UnnamedMangleContexts.insert(std::make_pair(Tag->getParent(), 0));
7620   UnnamedMangleNumbers.insert(std::make_pair(Tag, P.first->second++));
7621 }
7622 
7623 int ASTContext::getUnnamedTagManglingNumber(const TagDecl *Tag) const {
7624   llvm::DenseMap<const TagDecl *, unsigned>::const_iterator I =
7625     UnnamedMangleNumbers.find(Tag);
7626   return I != UnnamedMangleNumbers.end() ? I->second : -1;
7627 }
7628 
7629 unsigned ASTContext::getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl *CallOperator) {
7630   CXXRecordDecl *Lambda = CallOperator->getParent();
7631   return LambdaMangleContexts[Lambda->getDeclContext()]
7632            .getManglingNumber(CallOperator);
7633 }
7634 
7635 
7636 void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) {
7637   ParamIndices[D] = index;
7638 }
7639 
7640 unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const {
7641   ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D);
7642   assert(I != ParamIndices.end() &&
7643          "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl");
7644   return I->second;
7645 }
7646